Agilent Technologies ESA E4401B, ESA E4402B, ESA E4404B, ESA E4405B, ESA E4407B, ESA E4411B, ESA E4403B, ESA E4408B Spectrum Analyzer Service Guide
Below you will find brief product information for ESA E4401B, ESA E4402B, ESA E4404B, ESA E4405B, ESA E4407B, ESA E4411B, ESA E4403B, ESA E4408B The ESA series is a high performance line of spectrum analyzers. These analyzers are designed for a wide range of applications, including wireless communications, broadcast monitoring, and general-purpose RF measurements. These analyzers offer a combination of high sensitivity, wide dynamic range, and fast sweep speeds.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Service Guide
ESA Spectrum Analyzers
This manual provides documentation for the following instruments:
E4401B (9 kHz - 1.5 GHz)
E4402B (9 kHz - 3.0 GHz)
E4404B (9 kHz - 6.7 GHz)
E4405B (9 kHz - 13.2 GHz)
E4407B (9 kHz - 26.5 GHz) and
E4411B (9 kHz - 1.5 GHz)
E4403B (9 kHz - 3.0 GHz)
E4408B (9 kHz - 26.5 GHz)
Manufacturing Part Number: E4401-90474
Printed in USA
February 2014
Supersedes: April 2013
© Copyright 2000 - 2014 Agilent Technologies, Inc.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
Safety Notes
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication
1010, Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus, and has been supplied in a safe condition. The instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition.
The following examples illustrate warning and caution statements that are used throughout this manual.
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument.
This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earth ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
2
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a normal condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 101 and 664 respectively.
Warranty
This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to
Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country.
Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by
Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.
3
4
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. AGILENT
TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT,
OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
Lithium Battery Disposal
When the battery on the A4 processor assembly (3 volt lithium battery, part number 1420-0556) is exhausted and/or ready for disposal, dispose of it according to your country’s requirements. You can the battery to your nearest Agilent
Technologies Sales and Service office for disposal, if required. Refer to “Parts
DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT
COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE.
sk780a
Contents
1. Troubleshooting the Analyzer
5
Contents
2. Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance
Verifying the RF Section Performance
Verifying the RF Section Performance
6
Contents
to 75
Matching Pad (Option 1D7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tracking Generator (Option 1DN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tracking Generator (Option 1DQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8566 Series Programming Code Compatibility
Backpack Operating and Carrying Cases
Benchlink Web Remote Control Software
Commercial Calibration with Test Data
7
Contents
Noise Figure Measurement Personality and Hardware
RF and Digital Communications Hardware
/75
Minimum Loss Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Matching Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8
Contents
9
Contents
8. Performance Verification and Adjustment Software
10
1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Chapter 1 11
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
What You Will Find in This Chapter
What You Will Find in This Chapter
This chapter provides information that is useful when starting to troubleshoot an analyzer failure. It provides procedures for troubleshooting common failures and isolating problems in the analyzer. Assembly descriptions are located in
Component level information containing material lists, schematics, and component location diagrams, is available separately.
12 Chapter 1
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
WARNING
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Before You Start
Before You Start
There are four things you should do before starting to troubleshoot a failure: o Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the instrument, and read the general safety considerations and the safety note definitions given in the front of this guide.
o The analyzer contains static sensitive components. Read the section entitled
“ESD Information” on page 1-15 in this chapter.
o Become familiar with the organization of the troubleshooting information in this chapter.
o Read the rest of this section.
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage sources while it is being opened.
The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch (disconnecting device).
Always position the instrument for easy access to the disconnecting device
(detachable power cord).
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the analyzer from mains before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace fuses, and or circuit breakers only with same type and ratings. The use of other fuses, circuit breakers or materials is prohibited.
Chapter 1 13
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Before You Start
This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earth ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this product. Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage.
Before switching on this instrument, make sure of the following:
• the correct fuse is installed
• the supply voltage is in the specified range
This instrument has auto-ranging line voltage input, be sure the supply voltage is within the specified range and voltage fluctuations do not to exceed 10 percent of the nominal supply voltage.
The Agilent Technologies E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B,
E4408B, E4411B, E7402A, E7405A may be used with an E1779B
Rechargeable Battery Pack which contains a Ni-Cd battery. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly.
DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT
COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE.
sk780a
14 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Before You Start
Replacement Assemblies
The analyzer assemblies are not repairable to the component level. The following assemblies must be replaced as an assembly.
• RF assembly (E4401B, E4411B)
• RF assembly and associated microcircuits
(E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, E4408B)
• Frequency extension assembly (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, E4408B)
• IF assembly
• Power supply assembly
• Processor assembly
• Motherboard
• Speaker/floppy assembly
• Display
• Display interface board
• Option boards:
— Fast ADC assembly (Option AYX)
— FM Demod assembly (Option BAA)
— IF, Sweep, and Video Ports assembly (Option A4J)
— ACPR dynamic range enhancement assembly (Option 120)
— Bluetooth FM Demod assembly (Option 106)
— Noise Source Drive assembly (part of Option 219)
— Digital Demod DSP assembly (Option B7D)
— Digital Demod RF assembly (Option B7E)
The tracking generator assembly (Option 1DN or 1DP) consists of three subassemblies and is repairable to the subassembly level.
After an Analyzer Repair
If one or more analyzer assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related adjustments and performance verification tests. Refer to
Chapter 7 for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required
for each assembly.
ESD Information
Protection from Electrostatic Discharge
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic components. All work on electronic assemblies should be performed at a static-safe workstation.
shows an example of a static-safe workstation using two types of ESD protection: o Conductive table-mat and wrist-strap combination.
o Conductive floor-mat and heel-strap combination.
Chapter 1 15
WARNING
Figure 1-1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Before You Start
Both types, when used together, provide a significant level of ESD protection. Of the two, only the table-mat and wrist-strap combination provides adequate ESD protection when used alone. To ensure user safety, the static-safe accessories must
provide at least 1 megohm of isolation from ground. Refer to Table 1-1 on page 16
for information on ordering static-safe accessories.
These techniques for a static-safe workstation should not be used when working on circuitry with a voltage potential greater than 500 volts.
Example of a Static-Safe Workstation
Table 1-1 Static Safe Accessories
Part Number
85043-80013
9300-0980
Description
Set includes: 3M static control mat 0.4 m
0.6 m (16 inches 23 inches) and 4.6 cm (15 ft) ground wire, wrist strap, and wrist-strap cord.
Wrist-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft)
16 Chapter 1
Table 1-1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Before You Start
Static Safe Accessories
Part Number
9300-1367
9300-1308
Description
Wrist-strap, color black, stainless steel, without cord, has four adjustable links and a 7 mm post-type connection.
ESD heel-strap (reusable 6 to 12 months)
Chapter 1 17
CAUTION
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Before You Start
Handling of Electronic Components and ESD
The possibility of unseen damage caused by ESD is present whenever components are transported, stored, or used. The risk of ESD damage can be greatly reduced by close attention to how all components are handled.
o Perform work on all components at a static-safe workstation.
o Keep static-generating materials at least one meter away from all components.
o Store or transport components in static-shielding containers.
Always handle printed circuit board assemblies by the edges. This will reduce the possibility of ESD damage to components and prevent contamination of exposed plating.
Test Equipment Usage and ESD o Before connecting any coaxial cable to an analyzer connector, momentarily short the center and outer conductors of the cable together.
o Personnel should be grounded with a 1 megohm resistor-isolated wrist-strap before touching the center pin of any connector and before removing any assembly from the analyzer.
o Be sure that all analyzers are properly earth-grounded to prevent build-up of static charge.
For Additional Information about ESD
For more information about preventing ESD damage, contact the Electrical Over
Stress/Electrostatic Discharge (EOS/ESD) Association, Inc. The ESD standards developed by this agency are sanctioned by the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI).
18 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Check the Basics
Check the Basics
A problem can often be resolved by repeating the procedure you were following when the problem occurred. Before calling Agilent Technologies or returning the analyzer for service, please make the following checks: o Check the line fuse.
o Is there power at the receptacle? o Is the analyzer turned on? Make sure the fan is running, which indicates that the power supply is on. o If the display is dark or dim, press the upper Viewing Angle key in the upper-left corner of the front panel. If the display is too bright, adjust the lower
Viewing Angle key in the upper-left corner of the front panel.
o If other equipment, cables, and connectors are being used with your analyzer, make sure they are connected properly and operating correctly. o Review the procedure for the measurement being performed when the problem appeared. Are all the settings correct? o If the analyzer is not functioning as expected, return the analyzer to a known state by pressing the Preset key and Factory Preset (if present).
Some analyzer settings are not affected by a Preset. Refer to the
“Front-Panel Key Reference” chapter of the user’s guide for information on settings affected by a Preset.
o Is the measurement being performed, and the results that are expected, within the specifications and capabilities of the analyzer? Refer to the appropriate
“Specifications and Characteristics” chapters in the specifications guide for more details. o In order to meet specifications, the analyzer must be aligned. Either Auto Align
All must be selected (press System , Alignments , Auto Align , All ), or the analyzer must be manually aligned at least once per hour, or whenever the temperature changes more than 3
C. When
Auto Align , All is selected, AA appears on the left edge of the display. Refer to the appropriate “Specifications and Characteristics” chapters in the specifications guide for more details.
o Is the analyzer displaying an error message? If so, refer to the instrument messages/functional tests guide.
o If the necessary test equipment is available, perform the performance verification tests in the calibration guide or use the performance verification software. Record all results on a Performance Verification Test Record form which follows the tests. o If the equipment to perform the performance verification tests is not available, you may still be able to perform the functional checks in the user’s guide.
Chapter 1 19
CAUTION
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Problems at Instrument Power-Up
Problems at Instrument Power-Up
This section describes symptoms that can occur when the analyzer is first powered on.
Immediately unplug the analyzer from the ac power line if the unit shows any of the following symptoms:
• Smoke, arcing, or unusual noise from inside the unit, except as noted below.
• No response of any kind when unit is plugged into ac power mains and turned on.
• The analyzer ac power fuse blows.
• A circuit breaker or fuse on the main ac power line opens.
These potentially serious faults must be corrected before proceeding. Refer to
“Troubleshooting an Inoperative Analyzer” on page 21 .
Note that these analyzers are equipped with a speaker and normally emit noise from the speaker at power-up. This is not a problem; adjust the volume control as desired.
The analyzer will also occasionally emit “clicking” noises. These are normal and are related to the analyzer self alignment routines.
If the analyzer always turns on when power is applied, check the rear of the analyzer. There is an “always on” power mode switch that can be changed. Refer to the rear panel features section of the user’s guide for information on this switch.
20 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting an Inoperative Analyzer
Troubleshooting an Inoperative Analyzer
When an analyzer appears to be dead (no display or inoperative fan) there is often little evidence that points directly to the cause. This section provides steps and solutions to typical failure modes relating to an inoperative analyzer.
Before troubleshooting an analyzer, ensure that it has been set up correctly.
Check the Analyzer Setup
Perform the steps in the section titled “Check the Basics” earlier in this chapter.
Initial Checks
Perform the following initial checks when first troubleshooting an inoperative analyzer.
1. Is the fan running?
a. If the fan is not running, refer to the section “If the Fan is Not Operating” on page 22
.
b. If the fan is running, this indicates the power supply is functioning at least partially.
2. Is the display on?
a. If the display is blank, refer to the section
“Checking the Power Supplies” on page 23 . Also verify that the firmware is good by performing the
“Bootrom Self-Test Check” on page 38 .
b. If the display is on and the fan is running, suspect one or more power supplies is being pulled down, or a defective processor assembly. In either case, the analyzer outer case and inner shield must be removed. Refer to
Chapter 6 for removal procedures.
3. Check the power supplies.
a. To check the power supply voltages, refer to the section “Checking the
.
b. If the supplies all measure good, suspect a defective processor, or a defective LCD or interface board.
Chapter 1 21
WARNING
CAUTION
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting an Inoperative Analyzer
4. Perform the following checks for the processor assembly.
a. Is the analyzer “clicking?” The analyzer should occasionally emit
“clicking” noises. These are related to the analyzer automatic self alignment routines, and indicate the processor is basically functioning. When the analyzer is cold, there will be more self alignment activity (more clicking) than when it is warm.
If you do not hear any clicks after a few minutes, suspect a defective
processor assembly. Refer to the section “Troubleshooting the A4 Processor
b. Are the processor assembly LEDs all out? There are LEDs along the top edge of the processor assembly. These should all be off. To check their functionality, cycle the analyzer power. The processor LEDs should all go on for a few seconds, then go off. If one or more LEDs remains on, suspect
the processor assembly is defective. Refer to the section “Bootrom Self-Test
c. If the analyzer is clicking, and all of the processor LEDs are out, suspect a defective LCD or a defective front panel interface board. Refer to the section
“Troubleshooting the LCD Display” on page 25
.
If the Line Fuse Has Blown
If the line fuse has blown, perhaps a nonstandard fuse with too low a current rating was installed. If the line fuse still blows, suspect that the power supply assembly is defective.
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace fuses, and or circuit breakers only with same type and ratings. The use of other fuses, circuit breakers or materials is prohibited.
If the Fan is Not Operating
The power supply may be hot if the instrument has been operating without the fan running. Allow the instrument to cool down before troubleshooting.
1. If there is no display: a. Unplug the line-power cord.
b. Change the switch at the rear of the analyzer so the power is always on.
Refer to the rear panel features section of the user’s guide for information on this switch. This will bypass the front panel power switch.
22 Chapter 1
WARNING
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting an Inoperative Analyzer c. If the fan still does not turn on, suspect a defective power supply assembly.
Refer to the section “Checking the Power Supplies” on page 23 , to check
individual supply voltages.
d. If the fan starts, this indicates a problem with the front panel switch or the circuitry to the front panel switch.
2. If there is a display: a. Remove the analyzer outer case. Refer to
Chapter 6 for removal details.
b. Measure the fan voltage.
c. The fan voltage can be checked directly at the center of the fan where the wires connect. The fan normally operates on a voltage ranging from
5 to
16 Vdc depending on the temperature of the analyzer. As analyzer temperature increases, fan voltage should become more negative, increasing the speed of the fan.
If the correct voltage is present, suspect a defective fan.
If the voltage is not present, check the plug where the fan wires attach to the power supply board. If this looks good, suspect a defective power supply.
Refer to Chapter 6 for information on how to remove the power supply.
Checking the Power Supplies
The power supply test board is no longer supplied. If the power supply is suspect, change the power supply. All ESA models use the same power supply, so substitution is possible to determine if the power supply is defective.
The analyzer contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the safety symbols provided on the analyzer, and in the general safety instructions in this guide, before operating the unit with the cover removed. Ensure that safety instructions are strictly followed. Failure to do so can result in severe or fatal injury.
The +15 V and –12.6 V supplies can be measured directly on the probe power connector located on the front of the instrument. See
for these test points. If –12.6 V is within limits, it is a reasonably good indicator that –15 V is within specifications.
Chapter 1 23
Figure 1-2
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting an Inoperative Analyzer
Probe Power Connector Voltages
If All Low Voltage Supplies are At or Near Zero Volts
If all the power supplies are dead, suspect a defective A5 power supply assembly.
Refer to
for removal instructions.
If Some Low Voltage Supplies are At or Near Zero Volts
If some supplies are functioning while others are dead or low, it is possible that one of the assemblies in the analyzer is loading down the power supply.
In this case it is necessary to sequentially remove the assemblies, taking care to disconnect the line-power cord before removing any assembly. A logical first step would be to unplug the RF assembly ribbon cable from the motherboard at the rear of the instrument. This disconnects the complete RF section without having to remove it from the chassis. Refer to
for any other assembly removal procedures.
After an assembly is disconnected or removed, plug the line-power cord back into the analyzer and remeasure the supply that was down. If it is still down, continue with the assembly removal. If the supply is now up, suspect the last assembly removed as being defective.
24 Chapter 1
WARNING
Table 1-2
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the LCD Display
Troubleshooting the LCD Display
The only adjustment that can be made to the LCD display is the viewing angle.
This is found on the front panel of the analyzer in the upper left corner.
Viewing Angle
1. Verify that the analyzer has gone through a full power-on sequence. Refer to the section
“Troubleshooting an Inoperative Analyzer” on page 21 .
2. If the display is dark (not visible), connect an external VGA monitor to the rear panel VGA output connector on the analyzer. It is possible that some multisync monitors may not be able to lock to a 60 Hz sync pulse. If the video information is not present on the external VGA monitor, the most probable cause is the A4 processor assembly.
3. If the external VGA monitor is functioning, verify that the ribbon cables going to and from the A1A1 front panel interface assembly are aligned properly and securely plugged into the connectors.
4. To determine whether the A1A2 LCD display or the A1A1 front panel interface
assembly is defective, remove the front frame assembly. See Chapter 6,
The inverter board contains high voltage for the backlights. Carefully remove the inverter board by taking out the two screws securing it to the front frame, then turn it over to access the CN1 connector.
Refer to
Table 1-2 on page 25 and carefully measure the voltage coming into
the inverter board at CN1 pins 1-6 with a digital voltmeter.
Measurement Locations and Expected Voltages
Measurement Location
CN1 Pin 1
CN1 Pin 2
CN1 Pin 3
CN1 Pin 4
CN1 Pin 5
CN1 Pin 6
Expected Voltage from A1A1 Front
Panel Interface
0 Vdc
0 Vdc
5 Vdc
5 Vdc
30 mV
2.5 Vdc
The display is not field-repairable, and must be replaced as an assembly. Refer to
Chapter 5 for part-number information.
Chapter 1 25
Figure 1-3
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the LCD Display
LCD Troubleshooting Measurement Locations
NOTE
If the voltages are correct, the most probable cause of failure is the A1A2 LCD assembly.
The LCD has two backlights to illuminate the LCD. If both backlights are defective, the screen will be dark. The backlights can be replaced individually, however, it is improbable that both backlights are defective simultaneously. If one backlight is defective, the LCD will illuminate but the dimness will be noticeable, and you will need to replace A1A2DS1 or A1A2DS2. It is recommended that both backlights be replaced at the same time if it is likely that one simply wore out.
26 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Isolating an LO, IF, or Video Problem
Isolating an LO, IF, or Video Problem
This section provides techniques for isolating amplitude failures along the signal path.
Checking Detector Modes
The instrument has three detector modes known as peak, negative peak, and sample. All of these detectors are located on the A4 processor board. Normal instrument power up routes the detected video signal through the positive peak detector only. If there are no graticules, signal information, or screen annotations, refer to the section
“Troubleshooting the LCD Display” on page 25 . The
assumption from this point on is that the graticules and annotations have come up on the screen, but the noise floor and signal information is not present.
1. If no video is present on the analyzer screen switch to Sample or Negative Peak detector mode by pressing Det/Demod , Detector , and the proper softkey.
2. If the video signal appears in one of these two modes, the most probable cause is the A4 processor board itself.
3. If there is no video information present in any detector mode, inject a signal
assembly. The 2 Vdc can be measured on the motherboard at A7J13 pin 24 if the analyzer is an E4403B, E4408B, or E4411B. If you do not measure a dc level at approximately 2 Vdc, the IF assembly is the most probable cause. Refer to
.
4. If you measure 2 Vdc on the output of the IF assembly but do not see a flat line at the top of the graticule, there may be a problem between the output of the IF assembly and the input to the A4 processor board. Check for an open trace or a bent pin on the A7 motherboard.
5. If you measure 2 Vdc right up to the IF_VIDEO input on the A4 processor board and still don't have a flat
line near the top of the screen, the A4 processor board is the most probable cause.
Checking Corrected versus Uncorrected Performance Using
Video Shift On/Off
If you have a frequency response failure such as a power hole or power spike, you should turn the video shift off to see if the digital correction values are having an adverse effect on the analyzer performance.
1. Turn the video shift off by pressing System , Service , (Password =
2010),
Enter , Service , Video Shift On Off (Off).
2. If the power hole or spike goes away, perform the Frequency Response
Chapter 1 27
NOTE
NOTE
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Isolating an LO, IF, or Video Problem
Adjustments using the Adjustment Software. Refer to section “Using the
Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines” on page 32 for more information about
the video shift function.
3. If the power hole or power spike does not go away after re-adjusting the frequency response (flatness), the RF assembly is the most probable cause.
Verifying the A3 IF Assembly Performance
At frequencies >50 MHz in zero span, the gain of the A3 IF assembly will increase, necessitating the input level to be decreased for top of screen response. If the analyzer is in full span and the 21.4 MHz input frequency has a power level of
20 dBm, the displayed response will be the inverse of the RF assembly flatness.
Setting the Video Shift Off as stated in
“Checking Corrected versus Uncorrected
Performance Using Video Shift On/Off” on page 27
will result in a flat line. In narrow spans, the flatness correction will be done by changing the A3 IF assembly gain. In large spans, when it is not practical to change the A3 IF assembly gain as the analyzer sweeps, video shift is used for flatness correction. Some video shift will be used for flatness correction even when A3 IF assembly gains are also used, but the maximum video shift will be less that 1 dB, unless there is insufficient A3
IF assembly gain available.
1. Turn the Auto Align off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align , Off .
2. Perform an Align Now All by pressing System , Alignments , Align Now , All .
3. Verify that the initial failure viewed on the analyzer screen is acceptable.
a. If the signal on screen appears to be correct, turn the Auto Align back on by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align , All and make sure the signal remains correct.
b. If the signal is not correct press System , Alignments , Load Defaults ,
Load Defaults . (Press this key twice for the defaults to load.)
When the defaults are loaded, the IF filter response of some resolution bandwidth settings may appear distorted and the amplitude response may vary significantly as the resolution bandwidth is changed.
c. If the signal is not correct with the defaults loaded proceed to the next step.
Otherwise:
1. Perform Align Now All by pressing System , Alignments , Align Now ,
All and wait for the alignment to complete. Three complete alignment sequences will be performed.
2. Turn Auto Align back on by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align ,
All .
3. Verify the analyzer performance now that the A3 IF assembly has had the defaults loaded and the auto align has been turned back on.
28 Chapter 1
NOTE
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Isolating an LO, IF, or Video Problem
4. If the signal on screen is still not correct perform
“Checking Detector Modes” on page 27
. Now inject a 21.4 MHz signal at
10 dBm from a synthesizer into the A3 IF assembly. With the reference level at 0 dBm, the input attenuator set to 0 dB, and center frequency at 50 MHz in zero span, a flat line should appear at the top graticule.
5. If the signal is not at the top graticule, measure A7J13 pin 24 on the motherboard with a voltmeter and verify 2 Vdc. Refer to
.
6. If 2 Vdc is not present the most probable cause would be the A3 IF assembly, but first check for a bent pin on the A7J2 motherboard connector pin 16
(IF_VIDEO). Refer to
.
7. If 2 Vdc is present the most probable cause is either an A7 motherboard trace problem to the A4 processor board, a bent pin on A7J7 motherboard connector, or the A4 processor board itself.
Checking a Horizontal Trace With No Signal or Noise Floor
Present
1. For E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B connect the Amptd Ref out to the
Input.
Check the ADC circuitry on the A4 processor board by pressing Preset ,
FREQUENCY 50 MHz , SPAN , Zero Span , Input / Output , Amptd Ref Out
(On), AMPLITUDE , –27 dBm for 50
, or +24.75
dBmV for 75
input (for
E4401B or E4411B). For any other ESA, press Preset , FREQUENCY , 50 MHz ,
SPAN , Zero Span , Input/Output , Amptd Ref Out (On), AMPLITUDE ,
–20 dBm ( –27 dBm for E4401B or E4411B). This should provide a 2 Vdc output from the A3 IF assembly.
2. Connect a voltmeter to A7J13 pin 24 on the A7 motherboard to probe the output of the A3 IF assembly. If the IF assembly is working properly the voltmeter will read approximately 2 Vdc. Refer to
If you measure 2 Vdc at this point, the most probable cause is the A4 processor board.
If you DO NOT measure 2 Vdc at this point, check the integrity of the A3 IF
assembly as stated in “Verifying the A3 IF Assembly Performance” on page 28 .
It is possible that there is a bent pin (IF_VIDEO) on the A7 motherboard connectors or an open trace on the A7 motherboard itself. Follow the 2 Vdc from the output of the A3 IF assembly to the input of the A4 processor board.
Checking an Analyzer That Displays a Low Signal Level
A low signal level can be caused by a number of assemblies inside the analyzer.
1. Verify that this problem is not related to the detectors by performing the
procedure as stated in “Checking Detector Modes” on page 27
.
Chapter 1 29
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Isolating an LO, IF, or Video Problem
2. The two most common assemblies for a low signal level would be the RF assembly and the A3 IF assembly respectively. To verify the RF assembly performance see
Chapter 2, “Troubleshooting the RF Section,” on page 57
3. If step 2 measures properly, refer to “Verifying the A3 IF Assembly
.
Checking an Analyzer That Displays a High Noise Floor
A high noise floor is often caused by a low gain situation. When the analyzer adjusts for excessive low gain, the displayed noise level will rise too high.
1. Verify the ADC performance per the procedure in “Checking an Analyzer That
Displays a Low Signal Level” on page 29 before taking any measurements.
2. The RF assembly is the most probable cause due to an over-correction during the frequency response adjustment. To verify the RF assembly performance see
Chapter 2, “Troubleshooting the RF Section,” on page 57 .
If the 21.4 MHz IF alignment signal from the RF assembly was not getting to the A3 IF assembly the noise floor may rise. Verify the 21.4 MHz alignment
signal is getting switched to the A3 IF assembly as per “Checking the
21.4 MHz Alignment Signal” on page 31 .
3. Verify the A3 IF assembly performance per the procedure stated in
“Verifying the A3 IF Assembly Performance” on page 28 if the RF assembly appears to be
O.K.
Checking an Analyzer Signal Amplitude That Appears Too High
1. Verify the A3 IF assembly performance per the procedure stated in
“Verifying the A3 IF Assembly Performance” on page 28 .
2. Verify the RF assembly performance as per
Chapter 2, “Troubleshooting the
3. Verify the A4 processor board performance per the procedure stated in
“Checking a Horizontal Trace With No Signal or Noise Floor Present” on page
.
Checking an Analyzer Signal That Is Distorted
1. Verify the A3 IF assembly performance per the procedure stated in
“Verifying the A3 IF Assembly Performance” on page 28 .
2. Verify the RF assembly performance as per Chapter 2, "Troubleshooting the RF
30 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Isolating an LO, IF, or Video Problem
Checking an Analyzer Signal That Is Off Frequency
1. Verify the 10 MHz reference is adjusted properly as per the Reference
Frequency Adjustment using the Adjustment Software.
2. If the 10 MHz reference cannot be adjusted within specifications, the RF assembly is the most probable cause.
Checking the 21.4 MHz Alignment Signal
This alignment signal is generated on the RF assembly and is switched in during various background alignment sequences to align the A3 IF assembly. If this signal is not present during the alignments there will be problems with analyzer gains and possibly noise floor issues as well.
1. Verify this signal by turning the analyzer on and pressing Preset .
2. Turn Auto Align to off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align , Off .
3. Disconnect the flexible gray cable at the input of the A3 IF assembly (A3J2).
4. Connect the female end of an SMB tee to the A3 IF assembly, one end to a calibrated spectrum analyzer using an SMB cable, and the other end to the flexible gray cable that was previously connected.
5. Press System , Alignments , Align Now , All . During the Align IF you will see the 21.4 MHz alignment signal on your spectrum analyzer during most of this alignment. The power level should be approximately
55 dBm. If this signal is significantly lower, the RF assembly is the most probable cause.
6. Reconnect the flexible gray cable to the input of the A3 IF assembly (A3J2).
7. After measuring the 21.4 MHz alignment signal, turn the Auto Align back on by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align , All .
Chapter 1 31
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines
The analyzer has several routines which are helpful in diagnosing faults:
• Timebase (in Alignments menu)
• Timebase (in Service Menu, password-protected)
• Video Shift On Off (in Service Menu, password-protected)
• Align Now
• Visible Align
• Noise Source
• Load Defaults
• Restore System Defaults
• Front Panel Test (in Diagnostic menu)
The service menu is password protected. To access this menu, press System ,
Service . At the password prompt, enter
2010 and press
Enter .
Timebase (in Alignments Menu)
This function allows adjustment of the coarse and fine digital to analog converters
(DACs) controlling the voltage-controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO) timebase
(OCXO, if Option 1D5 is installed). The primary use for this function is verifying the timebase setability specification of the VCXO. Refer to the 10 MHz reference performance test in the user’s guide. However, it can also be used to verify proper operation of the phase locked loops (PLLs).
The coarse DAC has a resolution of approximately 9 Hz per DAC count (for the
VCXO). The fine DAC has a resolution of approximately 1.2 Hz per DAC count
(for the VCXO). Any changes made to these DACs will remain in effect until the power is cycled or the analyzer is Preset. To change the timebase DAC values stored in EEROM, it is necessary to use the Timebase function in the Service menu.
To check proper operation of the PLLs:
1. Connect a frequency counter to the 10 MHz REF OUT of the analyzer. Set the counter for 1 Hz frequency resolution.
2. Connect a 1 GHz,
10 dBm signal to the analyzer INPUT 50 .
3. On the analyzer, press Preset , FREQUENCY , 1 GHz, SPAN 100 kHz. If necessary, adjust the center frequency to place the 1 GHz signal at the center frequency.
32 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines
4. On the analyzer, press System , Alignments , Timebase , Coarse . Note the frequency displayed on the frequency counter and the position of the signal on screen. Use the knob to change the coarse timebase such that the signal displayed on the analyzer moves by 1 division (10 kHz). The coarse DAC value should require a change of approximately 11 counts (for the VCXO). If the signal does not move as the coarse DAC value is changed, the PLLs are not functioning properly.
5. Note the frequency displayed on the frequency counter. If the PLLs are operating properly, the difference between this new frequency and the frequency noted in step 4 should be approximately 100 Hz (for the VCXO). If this frequency difference is significantly greater or less than 100 Hz, the PLL is not functioning properly.
Timebase (in Service Menu)
The Timebase function in the Service menu functions the same way as the
Timebase function in the Alignments menu. However, with the Timebase function in the Service menu, the coarse and fine DAC values can be stored in EEROM by pressing Save . This function is used primarily to adjust the 10 MHz reference, but can also be used to check the PLLs as mentioned above. (A password is required to
access the Service menu. See step 2 on page 34 below.)
Video Shift On/Off
Amplitude errors in the analyzer are compensated for by adding IF gain on the A3
IF assembly, by “shifting” the digitized video signal, or by a combination of both
IF gain and video shift. By turning video shift on or off, it is possible to isolate problems in analog hardware from problems caused by faults in the auto alignment routines or adjustment procedures.
IF gain is used only to compensate for frequency response (“flatness”) errors when in relatively narrow spans. In the narrow spans, a single IF gain setting can compensate for the majority of the flatness error. In wider spans, however, a single
IF gain setting would not yield acceptable flatness. Therefore, in the wider spans, video shift is used to compensate for flatness errors.
When both IF gain and video shift are used, the amount of video shift is typically less than 1 dB; most of the amplitude correction is done with IF gain.
Video shift is also used to correct for log amplifier errors, especially errors more than 50 dB below the reference level. Therefore, when observing a signal in a narrow span, with the noise level more than 70 dB below the reference level, it is typical to see the signal peak change by only a few dB while the noise changes by approximately 25 dB as video shift is turned on and off.
To determine whether an anomaly (such as a glitch or spurious response on the trace) is caused by the analog hardware (“raw performance”) or caused by incorrect video shift being applied, proceed as follows:
1. Set up the analyzer so that the anomaly appears on the displayed trace.
Chapter 1 33
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines
2. Press System , Service . When prompted for the password, enter
2010 and press Enter.
3. Press Video Shift (Off).
4. If the anomaly disappears, it was caused by an unusually high amount of video shift being applied. This could be the result of an amplitude glitch during execution of an auto alignment routine or an adjustment procedure. Perform an
Align Now , All . Then, set Video Shift (On) and check whether or not the anomaly is still present. If so, it is necessary to perform the Frequency
Response Adjustment using the Adjustment Software .
5. If the anomaly does not disappear when Video Shift is set to Off, the hardware is at fault. The RF assembly is the most likely cause.
Align Now
During normal analyzer operation, a small portion of the analog circuitry is being realigned between each sweep. In this mode (“ Auto Align On ”), a complete realignment occurs approximately every 10 minutes to 1 hour. Realignments are done more frequently when the analyzer is first turned on (when it is cold) and then less frequently as the analyzer warms up. Normal analyzer operation is not interrupted in this “background” mode.
Align Now halts normal analyzer operation and forces a complete realignment of the entire system ( Align Now , All ) or of a piece of the system ( Align Now , RF , for example).
If any amplitude errors, bandwidth symmetry errors, or log fidelity errors occur, perform an Align Now , All . This will take approximately 60 seconds, depending upon installed options. Most of this time is spent aligning the IF subsystem. In some cases, it may be necessary to perform Align Now , All two or three times to correct serious errors.
If performing Align Now , All does not fix the problem, it may be necessary to first
Load Defaults (see below), and then perform Align Now , All . The analyzer will execute three complete alignment sequences.
34 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines
When performing Align Now , All or Align Now , RF , the presence of an external
50 MHz signal is checked. If an external 50 MHz signal >
25 dBm is detected, the RF alignment will be skipped and the message “Align RF skipped 50 MHz detected” will be displayed. If this occurs, remove the 50 MHz signal from the analyzer input and perform Align Now , All or Align Now , RF again.
Visible Align
The visible align function is turned off in normal operation. This function can be turned on so the user can view which hardware is being adjusted during the background alignment or during the auto alignment process.
To turn Visible Align on, press: System , Service ,
2010, Enter , Service, Align ,
Visible Align (On).
If a failure occurs during the alignment process, a fail message will appear on the screen. This message can aid in determining which assembly is causing the failure.
Visible align will remain on until it is turned off, instrument preset is pressed, or the instrument power is cycled. About 95% of the auto alignment process is adjusting IF-section related circuitry.
Noise Source
If the A7A13 Noise Source Driver Assembly is installed, and the firmware revision is A.12.00 or later, this function allows you to turn the noise source connected to the +28V PULSED or the SNS SERIES NOISE SOURCE connector output on and off. This can be used as part of a functional check of A7A13.
Load Defaults
If a problem occurs during an auto alignment routine (due to an intermittent hardware problem for example) the correction constants calculated by the auto alignment routine will be incorrect. Performing Align Now , All will not always allow recovery from such a failure.
Pressing Load Defaults loads default values for the alignment system, turns on the frequency corrections, and resets the timebase to the factory values. Once the default values for the alignment system are loaded, Align Now , All should be able to correctly align the analyzer.
Load Defaults can also be used with Auto Align Off to set the analyzer hardware to a consistent, nominal condition for future troubleshooting.
Restoring System Defaults
Restore Sys Defaults resets the analyzer to the original factory
set user configuration. It also performs an instrument preset. The following table shows the default user
configuration settings which result from pressing
Restore Sys
Defaults . To access this function, press System , Restore Sys Defaults .
Chapter 1 35
Table 1-3
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Using the Internal Service-Diagnostic Routines
Configuration Default Value
Amplitude units
Power-on
Analyzer address (Option A4H)
Baud rate (Option 1AX)
DTR Control (Option 1AX)
RTS Control (Option 1AX) dBm
IP (Preset)
18
9600
Hardware pacing on
Hardware pacing, input buffer full
Receive pacing (Option 1AX)
Transmit pacing (Option 1AX)
Color palette
Date mode
Print mode
Printer
Print orientation
Print Language
None
None
Default
Month-day-year format
Print screen
Auto
Portrait
PCL3
Color-capable
Prints per page
Time/Date display
Viewing angle
No
1
On
4
Volume 0
Use Restore Sys Defaults to return the analyzer to a known “safe” state.
36 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A4 Processor Assembly
Figure 1-4
Troubleshooting the A4 Processor Assembly
After you have determined that the problem is caused by the A4 processor assembly, use the following procedures to determine if A4 must be replaced or if it can be restored to normal operation. The ESA Spectrum Analyzer & EMC Analyzer
Component-Level Information is required to assist with some of these procedures.
Refer to Chapter 5 for a list of available component-level service information.
Initial Checks
The troubleshooting steps immediately following will help you determine whether or not the A4 processor assembly should be replaced or if it can be restored to normal operation. Some steps reference other troubleshooting procedures which appear later in this section.
1. If ADC-2V fail, ADC-Gnd fail, or ADC-time fail error messages are displayed, check for a 10 MHz signal at A7J15 pin 52. Refer to
Figure 1-2 on page 24 for information on probing A7J15 (the connector is not loaded). The
10 MHz signal is required to clock the ADC. If this 10 MHz signal is not present, suspect the RF assembly.
2. Verify the analyzer product number, serial number, and firmware revision.
Press System , Show System . The display should be similar to the following:
Example Show System Display
If the information is not correct, perform the Processor Initialization procedure in the adjustment software.
3. Turn the analyzer power Off and reseat A4. Referring to
Chapter 1 37
Table 1-4
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A4 Processor Assembly
, remove the vibration support. Referring to
remove the single screw (4) which secures the processor assembly (8) to the chassis. Carefully lift the processor assembly until the assembly disengages from the two motherboard connectors. Carefully plug the processor assembly into the motherboard. Replace the single screw (4) to secure the processor assembly to the chassis. Turn the analyzer power On. If normal operation is not restored, continue with step 4.
4. Perform the
“Bootrom Self-Test Check” as described in the following text.
5. If proper operation has not been restored by following the preceding steps, replace A4.
Bootrom Self-Test Check
When the analyzer is powered-on, the bootrom performs several self-tests. Before each test, the LEDs along the top edge of the A4 processor assembly will light in a pattern which indicates the test to be performed. As tests succeed, the pattern will change. If a test fails, the LED pattern will remain in a state which corresponds to the test that failed. If the display is not functioning, observing the LED pattern will provide information on the status of the self tests performed.
1. Power up the analyzer. Verify that LED DS1 is flashing approximately every one second. If DS1 in continuously on or off, replace the basic or enhanced memory A4 processor assembly.
The following table lists the LED patterns and their associated tests:
Self-Tests versus LED Pattern
LED Pattern
Self-Test Performed
Start of Test
Bootrom Flash EPROM Checksum
RAM used by Bootrom (destructive)
Remainder of RAM (non-destructive)
Main Firmware Checksum
All Tests Completed Successfully
1
1
1
1
1
0
D
S
1
D
S
7
D
S
13
D
S
11
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
D
S
9
D
S
12
D
S
10
D
S
8
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
2. Cycle the analyzer power and observe the LEDs. If all the LEDs do not light at the start of the test, the bootrom self-tests did not run. Turn the analyzer power
Off and reseat the bootrom, A4U77. Turn the analyzer power On. If the LEDs still do not light, replace the basic or enhanced memory A4 processor assembly.
3. If the self-test indicates a RAM failure, perform the
procedure below.
38 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A4 Processor Assembly
4. If all tests completed successfully, continue with step 5 on page 38 of the initial
checks for A4 troubleshooting.
Observing the LEDs as described above is useful if the LCD display is not functioning.
Clearing Dynamic RAM
The RAM in the analyzer can be cleared by setting switch 2 on A4S1 to the on position (toward the rear of the analyzer). Alternatively, the RAM can be cleared by the following procedure:
1. Turn the analyzer power Off.
2. Press and hold the Esc and Return keys simultaneously.
3. Turn the analyzer power On and wait 5 seconds while continuing to hold the
Esc and Return keys.
4. Release the Esc and Return keys.
5. Cycle the analyzer power. The entire RAM has been set to 0.
Clearing Flash EPROM
Flash EPROM can be cleared by setting switch 3 on A4S1 to the on position
(toward the rear of the analyzer). Wait approximately 10 minutes to ensure the flash EPROM is erased. This should only be performed when all contents of flash
EPROM need to be erased. Alternatively, flash EPROM may be cleared by the following procedure:
1. Turn the analyzer power Off.
2. Press and hold the Esc and View/Trace keys simultaneously.
3. Turn the analyzer power On and wait 5 seconds while continuing to hold the
Esc and View/Trace keys.
4. Release the Esc and View/Trace keys.
5. Wait approximately 10 minutes to ensure flash EPROM is fully erased.
6. Cycle the analyzer power. The entire Flash EPROM has been set to 0.
Chapter 1 39
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator (E4401B and E4411B)
(Option 1DN/1DQ)
Troubleshooting the A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator
(E4401B and E4411B) (Option 1DN/1DQ)
The A2 tracking generator (TG) assembly (Option 1DN/1DQ), is comprised of three board assemblies: the A2A1 tracking generator control board, the A2A2 tracking generator RF board, the A2A3 tracking generator output board. The troubleshooting procedures which follow will help to isolate a failure to one of these three board assemblies.
If Output is Unleveled (TG Unleveled message displayed)
A window comparator on the A2A2 tracking generator RF board is used to monitor the ALC lines. If an unleveled condition occurs, L_UNLEVELED will be set true (low). The unleveled indicator is checked at the end of each sweep. For this reason, it is possible that the output could be unleveled during a portion of a sweep, and although the output returns to a leveled condition by the end of the sweep, TG
Unleveled will be displayed at the end of the sweep.
If TG Unleveled is displayed, proceed as follows:
1. Verify that the tracking generator frequency is between 9 kHz and 1.5 GHz for
50 tracking generators between 1 MHz and 1.5 GHz for 75 tracking generators. Also verify that the source amplitude setting is between 0 dBm and
70 dBm for 50
and between
42.75 dBmV and 27.25 dBmV for 75
.
2. Check at which frequencies the output is unleveled. Set the analyzer to zero span and step the center frequency in 50 MHz increments. Note at which frequencies the output is unleveled.
3. Check at which power levels the output is unleveled. With the analyzer in zero span, set the center frequency to 50 MHz or one of the frequencies noted in
step 2 on page 40 . Lock the source attenuation to 0 dB by pressing
Source ,
Attenuation , Auto Man (Man). Press Amptd , Step , Auto Man (Man),
Amplitude On Off (On), 0 dBm and step the Source Amptd setting in 1 dB increments from 0 dBm to
15 dBm for 50
input. Step the Source Amptd setting in 1 dB increments from 42.75 dBmV to 27.75 dBmV for 75
input.
Note at which power levels the output is unleveled. The output may be unleveled when the power level is greater than +1 dBm for 50 or
43.75 dBmV for 75
.
4. Perform the Tracking Generator ALC and the Tracking Generator Frequency
Slope adjustments using the Adjustment Software.
5. Check the presence of the 10 MHz reference. Temporarily remove the A2
tracking generator assembly. Refer to Chapter 6 for removal instructions. If a
10 MHz signal is not present on A7J10 pin 52, suspect the RF assembly. Refer
. Reinstall A2.
6. Check that the TG LO signal is present.
40 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator (E4401B and E4411B)
(Option 1DN/1DQ) a. Set the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz and zero span.
b. Use an active probe, such as the HP/Agilent 85024A, and a microwave spectrum analyzer to probe A2A1J4. J4 is not loaded, but the holes for the jack are present; probe the center hole. One of the other four holes may be used for a ground connection.
c. Set the microwave spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 2.5 GHz and a span of 1 GHz.
d. An LO signal of 2.45 GHz at approximately
20 dBm should be present. e. If the LO signal is not present, or is significantly off frequency, suspect the
A2A1 tracking generator control board.
f. If the LO signal is OK, suspect the A2A2 tracking generator RF board.
If the TG LO is Unlocked (TG LO Unlocked message displayed)
The TG LO is referenced to the 10 MHz reference generated on the RF assembly.
The TG LO resides on the A2A1 tracking generator control board.
1. Check the presence of the 10 MHz reference. Temporarily remove the A2 tracking generator assembly. Refer to
for removal instructions. If a
10 MHz signal is not present on A7J10 pin 52, suspect the RF assembly. Refer to
. Reinstall A2.
2. Check that the TG LO signal is present.
a. Set the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz and zero span.
b. Use an active probe, such as the HP/Agilent 85024A, and a microwave spectrum analyzer to probe A2A1J4. J4 is not loaded, but the holes for the jack are present; probe the center hole. One of the other four holes may be used for a ground connection.
c. Set the microwave spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 2.5 GHz and a span of 1 GHz.
d. An LO signal of 2.45 GHz at approximately
20 dBm should be present. e. If the LO signal is not present, or is significantly off frequency, suspect the
A2A1 tracking generator control board.
f. If the LO signal is OK, suspect the A2A1 tracking generator control board
(the lock-detect circuitry is also on A2A1).
If the Tracking Generator Is Not Properly Recognized by the
Firmware
When the analyzer is powered-up, the firmware queries each board assembly for its identification information. If a board does not respond to a query, it is assumed to not be present. If the A2 tracking generator assembly does not respond to the firmware’s query, the functions under the Source menu will not be available.
Chapter 1 41
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator (E4401B and E4411B)
(Option 1DN/1DQ)
1. Check the Show System screen. Press System , Show System . Verify that
“1DN: 1.5 GHz TG, 50
” or “1DQ: 1.5 GHz TG, 75
” is displayed.
2. If the information in the Show System screen does not identify a tracking generator, try reseating A2 in its motherboard connector. If Show System still does not identify a tracking generator, suspect the A2A1 tracking generator control board.
3. If the information in the Show System screen identified a 75 tracking generator (Option 1DQ), but the tracking generator is actually a 50
tracking generator (Option 1DN). The A2A3 tracking generator output board might not be properly connected to A2A2J4. A2A2J4 pin 2 is normally grounded by the
A2A3 tracking generator output board to identify the A2 assembly as a 50 ohm tracking generator. If A2A2J4 pin 2 is not connected, this line will be pulled high, causing the A2 assembly to be identified as a 75 tracking generator.
If Flatness is Out of Tolerance
1. Check the output connector for damage. Replace the connector if it is damaged.
2. Perform the Tracking Generator ALC and Tracking Generator Frequency
Slope adjustments using the Adjustment Software.
3. If the adjustments did not bring flatness within tolerance, suspect the A2A2 tracking generator RF board or the A2A3 tracking generator output board.
If Vernier Accuracy is Out of Tolerance
1. Perform the Tracking Generator ALC Adjustment using the Adjustment
Software.
2. If the adjustment did not bring vernier accuracy within tolerance, suspect the
A2A2 tracking generator RF board.
If Harmonics and Spurious Outputs are Too High
High harmonic output levels will generally be caused by problems on the A2A2 tracking generator RF board. However, some non-harmonic spurious output levels may be caused by the TG LO on the A2A1 tracking generator control board.
1. If harmonic output levels are out of tolerance, suspect the A2A2 tracking generator RF board.
2. If non-harmonic output levels are out of tolerance, note the frequency difference between the fundamental output frequency and the spurious output.
Check the LO to see it also displays a spurious output with the same frequency difference: a. Set the analyzer to the center frequency used to determine the out-of-tolerance condition and zero span.
b. Use an active probe, such as the HP/Agilent 85024A, and a microwave spectrum analyzer to probe A2A1J4. J4 is not loaded, but the holes for the
42 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator (E4401B and E4411B)
(Option 1DN/1DQ) jack are present; probe the center hole. One of the other four holes may be used for a ground connection.
c. Set the microwave spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of
2.4 GHz higher than the analyzer center frequency. Set the span to at least twice the frequency difference between the non-harmonic spurious output and the fundamental output. d. An LO signal at approximately
20 dBm should be present.
e. If the LO shows a spurious response at an offset equal to the difference between the tracking generator’s fundamental output and the non-harmonic spurious output, suspect the A2A1 tracking generator control board.
f. If the LO does not show a spurious response as described above, suspect the
A2A2 tracking generator RF board.
Chapter 1 43
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator (E4401B and E4411B)
(Option 1DN/1DQ)
If Power Sweep is Not Functioning Properly
The power sweep function is implemented on the A2A2 tracking generator RF board, but is controlled via digital signals from the A2A1 tracking generator control assembly.
1. Perform the Absolute Amplitude and Vernier Accuracy performance test in the calibration guide.
2. If the performance test passes, suspect the A2A2 tracking generator RF board.
3. If the performance test fails, perform the Tracking Generator ALC Adjustment using the Performance Verification and Adjustment Software. Rerun the performance test.
4. If the performance test fails again, suspect the A2A1 tracking generator control board (digital control signals might be corrupted) or the A2A2 tracking generator RF board (the power level control DACs might not be responding properly).
If There is No Output Power
No output power can be caused not only by a failure in the mixer, output amplifier, or output attenuators, but also by one of the two synthesizers being extremely off-frequency.
1. Check the presence of the 10 MHz reference. Temporarily remove the A2 tracking generator assembly. Refer to
Chapter 6 for removal instructions. If a
10 MHz signal is not present on A7J10 pin 52, suspect the RF assembly. Refer
. Reinstall A2.
2. Check that the TG LO signal is present.
a. Set the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz and zero span.
b. Use an active probe, such as the HP/Agilent 85024A, and a microwave spectrum analyzer to probe A2A1J4. J4 is not loaded, but the holes for the jack are present; probe the center hole. One of the other four holes may be used for a ground connection.
c. Set the microwave spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of
2.5 GHz and a span of 1 GHz.
d. An LO signal of 2.45 GHz at approximately
20 dBm should be present.
e. If the LO signal is not present, or is significantly off frequency, suspect the
A2A1 tracking generator control board.
f. If the LO signal is OK, suspect the A2A2 tracking generator RF board or the A2A3 tracking generator output board.
44 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator (E4402B, E4403B,
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B) (Option 1DN)
Troubleshooting the A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator
(E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B) (Option 1DN)
The tracking generator (TG) assembly (Option 1DN) is comprised of three major assemblies: the A2A1 tracking generator control board, the A2A2 tracking generator assembly, and the A2A3 output attenuator.
The A2A1 tracking generator control board plugs directly into the motherboard where it receives the I/O inputs and power supplies. The A2A1 tracking generator control board performs three main functions:
• provides the power supplies and modulator drive voltages to the A2A2 tracking generator
• provides an amplitude-compensated leveled 1st LO output to the A2A2 tracking generator
• provides the correct switching logic for the A2A3 output attenuator
The A2A3 output attenuator is a 56 dB step attenuator (in 8 dB steps) that simply controls the RF output level to the front panel RF output connector. This attenuator is automatically coupled to the desired output source power.
The A2A2 tracking generator receives all the correct switching logic and input frequencies to yield the desired tracking generator output. It is a self-contained non-serviceable assembly and must be replaced if proven defective.
To help isolate a TG-related failure, verify the TG performance by pressing the
following analyzer keys, make the measurements listed in Table 1-5 on page 46
, and compare the results with the levels indicated in that table:
Preset
FREQUENCY 50 MHz
SPAN , Zero Span
Source
AMPLITUDE (On)
Measure locations A-D with a calibrated spectrum analyzer.
With the settings stated above, the tracking generator source power should be
10 dBm and the tracking output attenuator (A2A3) will be set to 8 dB.
Chapter 1 45
Table 1-5
Signal
Description
1st LO Input
1st LO Output
RF Output
600 MHz
Figure 1-5
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator (E4402B, E4403B,
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B) (Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Troubleshooting
Notes Measurement
Location
A
Expected
Frequency
3971.4 MHz
Expected
Amplitude
0 dBm
B
C
D
3971.4 MHz
50 MHz
600 MHz
+13 dBm
2 dBm
7 dBm
LO Input from A8A1A2 LO board on E4402B and E4403B. LO Input from A8A4 LO Amp/IF Switch on the E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and
E4408B. Measured at the cable end.
LO Output from A2A1 TG controlboard to A2A2J4 TG Input.
Measured on the output of the TG control board.
RF Output from A2A2J2 TG.
Measured at J2
600 MHz from A8A1A1J2 reference/3rd converter to A2A2J5.
Measured at the cable end.
3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Measurement Locations
46 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B,
E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
The ESA Spectrum Analyzer base unit may effect any of the measurements performed with Options B7D and B7E. Verify that the base instrument functions correctly prior to troubleshooting the digital demod options.
The Digital Demod RF (DDRF) board, Option B7E, downconverts the 21.4 MHz
IF to the various intermediate frequencies (IF) required for the Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) board, Option B7D. The DDRF board also provides the sample rate oscillator for the DSP board. The DDRF board allows the user to input a reference frequency from 1 MHz to 30 MHz. The DDRF board divides the signal appropriately to produce a 10 MHz reference signal. This signal can then be routed to the 10 MHz reference on the ESA spectrum analyzer. The DDRF board provides no additional functionality without a measurement personality loaded.
The DSP board, Option B7D, performs the digital demodulation of the signal. The option is used when performing phase and frequency measurements with the GSM personality, Option BAH and modulation accuracy measurement with the cdma-
One personality, Option BAC. Fast time domain sweeps from the DSP FADC is the only functionality available without a personality.
Troubleshooting Analyzer Mode Errors Caused By the DDRF or
DSP Boards
If the analyzer will not power-up or powers off prior to completing the initial alignment, remove the DDRF and DSP boards. If this corrects the problem, insert the boards in sequence to determine which of the two boards is causing the problem. Replace the defective board. Refer to
If the problem observed is specific to running the BAC or BAH measurement personalities, refer to
“Troubleshooting the Digital Demodulation Hardware When
Running the cdmaOne or GSM Personalities” on page 48
. If option B7D or B7E are suspected of causing amplitude or frequency errors in the spectrum analyzer
(SA) mode this could be caused by the routing of the IF signal through the DDRF board. The IF signal is input to the DDRF board at connector J11. The IF signal is switched out through connector J10 when the instrument is in the SA mode. To verify that the DDRF IF OUT A7A8J10 signal is correct perform the following procedure:
Chapter 1 47
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
1. Connect the AMPTD REF OUT signal to the input of the ESA spectrum analyzer.
2. Power on the spectrum analyzer.
3. Set the Center Frequency of the spectrum analyzer to 50 MHz.
4. Set the SPAN to Zero Span.
5. Turn Auto Align to Off.
6. Set the internal Attenuation to 0 dB.
7. Turn the 50 MHz AMPTD REF ON by pressing INPUT and Amptd Ref On.
8. A flat trace should be displayed at –20 dBm.
• If this trace is present, it is probable that the DDRF IF circuitry is functioning correctly.
• If this trace is not present, refer to
Chapter 2, “Troubleshooting the RF
.
• If the 21.4 MHz IF output from A8A1A1 is correct, continue to the next step.
9. Verify that the Signal present at the DDRF connector J10 is approximately
–20 dBm with an 8560 E-Series spectrum analyzer or equivalent.
10. If this signal is not present or the amplitude difference is significant:
• Verify that the input attenuation is 0 dB
• Verify that Cable W29 DDRF IF IN cable is not faulty.
• Replace the DDRF board.
Troubleshooting the Digital Demodulation Hardware When
Running the cdmaOne or GSM Personalities
The functional check of the option boards will require signal generator E4433B with Options UN5, UND, and 1E5 for cdmaOne or Options UN8 and 1E5 for
GSM.
Verify that the GSM or cdmaOne measurement personality is installed in the spectrum analyzer by pressing the MODE key on the ESA. A softkey menu should be displayed with cdmaOne or GSM selection available. If neither of these personalities exist, go to the following URL to download a copy to install: www.agilent.com/find/esa
The installation instructions are available on this site. Verify that the personalities have been licensed by pressing System , Personalities , GSM or cdmaOne . GSM or cdmaOne should be listed as being licensed. If no license information is present, verify, with the customer, that option BAH or BAC has been installed and licensed.
48 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
Verifying the Operation with the cdmaOne Option BAC Personality
Step 1: Functional Check
1. Connect the signal generator RF out to the input of the ESA spectrum analyzer and the 10 MHz OUT of the spectrum analyzer to the 10 MHz reference IN on the signal generator.
2. Configure the signal generator by pressing the following keys:
Mode
Arb Waveform Generator
CDMA
Formats
IS-95A
CDMA Off/On (ON)
Setup Select
Pilot
Frequency , 870.03, and MHz
Amplitude , –10, and dBm
RF On/Off (ON)
3. Configure the spectrum analyzer by pressing the following keys:
Mode cdmaOne
FREQUENCY (Verify that the RF channel selected is 1 and the frequency is
870.03 MHz)
MEASURE
Modulation Accuracy (Rho)
The spectrum analyzer display should be very similar to Figure 1-6
.
Verify that the EVM, Mag Error, Phase Error, and Rho are close to the values shown in
Figure 1-6 . If the results are similar to the ones listed above, the digital
demodulation hardware is functioning correctly. You can verify the performance using the Performance Verification Test procedure in the calibration guide.
Chapter 1 49
Figure 1-6
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Display
• If a “DSP Failure” error message is displayed or if any LED (DS1 through
DS8) on the DSP board are ON, replace the digital demod DSP board.
• If the EVM or Magnitude Errors are very large, this could be indicative of spectrum analyzer phase noise or 321.4 MHz amplitude flatness problems with the second IF.
• If the measurement does not start or the message “Signal could not be
Correlated” is displayed, verify that the spectrum analyzer functions correctly
in the SA mode then proceed to “Step 2: Verify that the DSP IF OUT is functioning correctly.”
• If the results are not close to the values listed in
spectrum analyzer functions correctly in the SA mode then proceed to “Step 2:
Verify that the DSP IF OUT is functioning correctly.”
50 Chapter 1
Figure 1-7
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
Step 2: Verify that the DSP IF OUT is functioning correctly.
1. Set the ESA Spectrum Analyzer and signal generator to the settings in STEP 1.
2. Observe the DSP IF OUT at connector J5 of the DDRF board with an 8560E series spectrum analyzer or equivalent spectrum analyzer with a Center
Frequency of 3.7 MHz and a SPAN of 5 MHz. The output should be similar to
.
8560E Series Spectrum Analyzer Display
This signal will periodically be displayed on the 8560E series spectrum analyzer when the signal is periodically routed to the DSP board through the DDRF connector J5.
• If this signal is not periodically displayed on the 8560E series spectrum analyzer replace the DDRF board.
• If the signal is periodically present proceed to
“Step 3: Verify the Sample Rate
Step 3: Verify the Sample Rate Clock
Verify a Clock signal is present at connector J12 of the DDRF board.
• If this signal is not present, replace the DDRF board.
• If both the Sample Rate Clock and DSP IF out signals are present and correct on the DDRF board, replace the DSP board.
Chapter 1 51
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
Verifying Operation With the GSM Option BAH Personality
Step 1. Functional Check
1. Connect the signal generator RF out to the input of the ESA Spectrum Analyzer and the 10 MHz OUT of the spectrum analyzer to the 10 MHz reference IN on the signal generator.
2. Configure the signal generator by pressing the following keys:
MODE
Real Time I/Q BaseBand
TDMA
GSM
GSM Off/On ON
Data Format to Framed
Frequency , 935.2, and MHz
A mplitude , –20, and dBm
RF On/Off On
3. Configure the spectrum analyzer by pressing the following keys:
MODE
GSM
Frequency Verify that the ARFCN channel selected is 1 and the Frequency is 935.2 MHz.
MEASURE
Phase and Frequency
Meas Setup
Trigger Source
RF Burst (Wideband).
The ESA display should be very similar to
52 Chapter 1
Figure 1-8
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
Phase and Frequency Error Display
Verify that the Phase Error and Frequency are close to the values displayed in
Figure 1-8 . If the results are similar to the ones listed above, the digital
demodulation hardware is functioning correctly. You can verify the performance using the Performance Verification Test procedure in the calibration guide.
• If a “DSP Failure” error message is displayed or if any LED (DS1 through
DS8) on the DSP board are ON replace the digital demod DSP board.
• If the Phase and Frequency Errors are very large this could be indicative of a spectrum analyzer phase noise problem.
• If the measurement does not start or the message “Valid GSM Burst not Found” is displayed, verify that the spectrum analyzer functions correctly in the SA mode.
If SA mode function is correct, replace the DDRF board and repeat
• If the results are not close to the values listed in
, verify that the spectrum analyzer functions correctly in the SA mode.
If SA mode function is correct, replace the DDRF board and repeat
• If the results are still incorrect, replace the DSP board and repeat
Chapter 1 53
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
Troubleshooting the A7A13 Noise Source Driver Assembly
The A7A13 Noise Source Driver assembly contains the circuitry to control either an SNS Series Noise Source (SNS) or a 346 Series (Norm) Noise Source. This assembly is used exclusively by the Noise Figure Measurement Personality,
Option 219. In addition to switching the noise source on and off via a signal which toggles between 0 V (Off) and 28 V (On), it provides the interface to download the
ENR data from the SNS Series noise sources.
Verify +28V PULSED Output Operation
1. Connect a voltmeter to the +28V PULSED output on the analyzer rear panel using a BNC cable and a BNC to dual banana plug adapter.
2. Set the voltmeter to read dc voltages between 0 and 30V.
3. On the analyzer, press System , More , More , Service .
4. Press
2010
, Enter .
5. Press Service , More , Noise Source (On).
6. Verify that the voltmeter reads +28V ± 0.1 V.
7. Press Noise Source (Off)
8. Verify that the voltmeter reads less than +1 V.
9. If the voltages measured are not as described above, the A7A13 Noise Source
Driver assembly is defective.
Verify SNS Digital Interface Operation
To properly verify the digital interface capability of A7A13, it is necessary to have the Noise Figure Measurement Personality installed and licensed. Also, a known good SNS Series Noise Source (model N4000A, N4001A, or N4002A) and a noise source cable (11730A or 8120-8319) will be needed.
1. Connect the SNS Series Noise Source to the SNS SERIES NOISE SOURCE connector on the rear panel.
2. Enter the Noise Figure Measurement Personality by pressing MODE , Noise
Figure . It will take several seconds for the analyzer to switch to the Noise
Figure mode.
3. Press Meas Setup , ENR , Common Table (On).
4. Press SNS Setup . Set Preference to SNS.
5. Press Meas Setup , ENR , Meas & Cal Table . Press the right Tab key until the yellow highlight appears in the Frequency column.
6. Press More , Delete All . Press Delete All again to confirm the delete process.
7. Verify that the ENR table is empty and the error message “No entries in ENR table” appears in the status line.
54 Chapter 1
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
8. Press Fill Table From SNS .
9. After a few seconds, the ENR table should be filled with the data downloaded from the noise source. Verify that the serial number and model number shown on the screen agree with the serial number and model number of the noise source.
10. If the ENR data is not downloaded, the noise source driver assembly is defective.
Chapter 1 55
Troubleshooting the Analyzer
Troubleshooting the Digital Demod Hardware (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B) (Option B7D and B7E)
56 Chapter 1
2
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Chapter 2 57
Troubleshooting the RF Section
What You Will Find in This Chapter
What You Will Find in This Chapter
This chapter provides information that is useful when starting to troubleshoot the
RF section of the analyzer. It explains how to isolate RF problems and provides procedures for troubleshooting common failures.
Component level information containing material lists, schematics, and component location diagrams, is available separately.
58 Chapter 2
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4401B and E4411B)
Figure 2-1
Verifying the RF Section Performance
(E4401B and E4411B)
(9 kHz - 1.5 GHz)
This section provides techniques for isolating amplitude failures along the signal path.
The RF section downconverts the analyzer input signal to the final IF of 21.4 MHz.
You can troubleshoot the RF section by injecting a 50 MHz CW signal at –20 dBm to the RF input of the analyzer. The 21.4 MHz downconverted IF signal will be the input level minus the input attenuation. The RF section’s frequency response will roll off by about 8 dB at 1.5 GHz. The analyzer first upconverts to a 2.4214 GHz
1st IF and then downconverts to a 21.4 MHz IF. Refer to
examples of downconversion, one with an input frequency of 1 GHz, and one with an input frequency of 50 MHz.
Example of downconversion
A8 RF ASSEMBLY
RF INPUT
F
F
RF
RF
=1GHz
= 50MHz
RF
LO
IF
F IF
1
=2421.4MHz
F
LO 1
=3421.4MHz
F
LO
2
=2471.4MHz
RF
LO
IF
F
IF2
=21.4MHz
F
LO2
=2400MHz
TO IF ASSEMBLY sl759a
RF Performance Check
1. Inject a CW signal at 50 MHz at –20 dBm for a 50
analyzer and at
+28.76 dBmV for a 75
analyzer (Option 1DP) into the RF input of the analyzer.
2. Tune the analyzer to 50 MHz, zero span, with input attenuation set to 0 dB by pressing FREQUENCY , Center Freq , 50 MHz , SPAN , Zero Span ,
Attenuation Auto Man (Man), 0, dB .
3. Turn Auto Align On/Off to Off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align ,
Off .
Chapter 2 59
NOTE
Figure 2-2
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4401B and E4411B)
4. Disconnect the flexible gray cable (W2) going into the A3 IF assembly at A3J2.
5. Connect a calibrated spectrum analyzer to this flexible gray cable (W2) and measure the 21.4 MHz output from the RF section.
If the RF section is operating properly, you should measure
21.4 MHz out of the RF section at
20 dBm for a 50 analyzer and +28.76 dBmV for a 75
analyzer on the calibrated spectrum analyzer. See
If your signal amplitude is too high or too low, vary the input attenuation from 0 to
60 dB and note that for every 5 dB of attenuator change, the 21.4 MHz IF output signal from the RF section should change 5 dB as well. The signal amplitude problem may be the result of a defective attenuator/switch on the RF section itself.
21.4 MHz Output
A8A1A1
• If you notice a frequency response problem, visually inspect the RF input connector for mechanical integrity.
• If the analyzer has a frequency response problem, you can inject the frequency of interest, tune the analyzer to that frequency in zero span, and monitor the
21.4 MHz IF signal level for abnormalities on your calibrated spectrum analyzer.
• If you have excessive loss through the RF section, replace the RF section.
You can also use the internal 50 MHz calibrator signal for troubleshooting by pressing Input , Amptd Ref On Off (On). This is a 50 MHz signal at approximately
27 dBm for 50 analyzers or +21.75 dBmV for 75 analyzers that originates from the RF section.
60 Chapter 2
Figure 2-3
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
Verifying the RF Section Performance
(E4402B and E4403B)
(9 kHz - 3 GHz)
This section provides techniques for isolating amplitude failures along the signal path.
The RF section downconverts the analyzer input signal to the final IF of 21.4 MHz.
You can troubleshoot the RF section by injecting a 50 MHz CW signal at –20 dBm to the RF input of the analyzer. The 21.4 MHz downconverted IF signal will be the input level minus the input attenuation. There are three conversions made in these analyzers. Refer to
Figure 2-3 for two examples of downconversion: one with an
input frequency of 1 GHz, and one with an input frequency of 50 MHz.
RF Section
Quick Check RF Procedure
1. Inject a 50 MHz CW signal at –20 dBm into the RF input of the analyzer.
2. Tune the analyzer to 50 MHz, zero span, with input attenuation set to 0 dB by pressing FREQUENCY , Center Freq , 50 , MHz , SPAN , Zero Span ,
Attenuation Auto Man (Man), 0, dB .
3. Turn Auto Align On/Off to Off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align ,
Off .
4. Disconnect the flexible gray cable (W2) going into the A3 IF assembly at A3J2.
Chapter 2 61
Figure 2-4
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
5. Connect a calibrated spectrum analyzer to this flexible gray cable (W2) and measure the 21.4 MHz output from the RF section.
If the RF section is operating properly, you should measure 21.4 MHz out of
the RF section at –20 dBm on the calibrated spectrum analyzer. See Figure 2-4
.
21.4 MHz RF
NOTE If your signal amplitude is too high or too low, vary the input attenuation from 0 to
65 dB and note that for every 5 dB of attenuator change, the 21.4 MHz IF output signal from the RF section should change 5 dB as well. The signal amplitude problem may be the result of a defective A8A5 input attenuator or the attenuator logic from A8A1A1 Reference/Third Converter.
62 Chapter 2
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
Detailed RF Troubleshooting
To isolate the failing assembly, use the analyzer settings as stated in
, then refer to Table 2-1 on page 63 ,
, and
Figure 2-6 to measure the troubleshooting points throughout the RF section. The
Measurement Location column of the table corresponds to the locations called out on the drawing and the block diagram. The Expected Measured Signal column references figures that illustrate the signal expected at that measurement point.
RF Section Troubleshooting Points Table 2-1
Signal
Description
Measurement
Location a
Expected
Frequency
Expected Level Expected
Measured
Signal b
Notes
1st IF Output A 3921.4 MHz
23.2 dBm
A8A1A2 has ~3.2 dB of loss.
2nd IF Output B 321.4 MHz
27.5 dBm
A8A2 has ~4.5 dB of loss.
RF Input
1st LO Output
C
D
50 MHz
3971.4 MHz
20.5 dBm
1 dBm
3 to +6 dBm
Out of A8A1A2
2nd LO Input
2nd LO
Multiplied
E
F
Block Diagram only
600 MHz
3600 MHz
13.5 dBm
Out of A8A1A1
(through A7A9 with
Option 120)
Out of A8A2J5 LO
Test Port
600 MHz TG G 600 MHz
7 dBm
Out of A8A1A1
10 MHz
Reference
H 10 MHz +5 dBm
50 MHz
Amplitude
Reference
I 50 MHz
20 dBm
a. To locate the measurement points, refer to
and
.
b.
To see the signal expected at each measurement location, reference the figures in this column.
Rear Panel 10 MHz
Ref. Out
Out of A8A1A1
Chapter 2 63
Figure 2-5
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
RF Section Troubleshooting Points
64 Chapter 2
Figure 2-6
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
RF Section Block Diagram (E4402B and E4403B)
Chapter 2 65
Figure 2-7
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
1st IF Output
A8A1A2J3
Figure 2-8 2nd IF Output
A8A2
66 Chapter 2
Figure 2-9
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
RF Input Measured from A8A3
Figure 2-10 1st LO Output
A8A1A2J5
Chapter 2 67
Figure 2-11
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
600 MHz 2nd LO
A8A1A1P1
Figure 2-12 2nd LO Test Port
A8A2J5
68 Chapter 2
Figure 2-13
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
600 MHz BITG Drive
A8A1A1P3
Figure 2-14 10 MHz Reference Output
Chapter 2 69
Figure 2-15
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4402B and E4403B)
50 MHz Cal Out Signal
70 Chapter 2
Figure 2-16
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
Verifying the RF Section Performance
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
(9 kHz - 6.7 GHz, 13.2 GHz or 26.5 GHz)
The RF section downconverts the analyzer input signal to the final IF of 21.4 MHz.
You can troubleshoot the RF section by injecting a 50 MHz CW signal at –20 dBm to the RF input of the analyzer. The 21.4 MHz downconverted IF signal will be the input level minus the input attenuation. There are three conversions made in these analyzers.
“Quick Check” RF Procedure in Low Band (Non-Preselected)
1. Inject a 50 MHz CW signal at –20 dBm into the RF input of the analyzer.
2. Tune the analyzer to 50 MHz, zero span, with input attenuation set to 0 dB by pressing FREQUENCY , Center Freq , 50 MHz , SPAN , Zero Span , Attenuation
Auto Man (Man), 0 dB .
3. Turn Auto Align On/Off to Off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align ,
Off .
4. Disconnect the flexible gray cable (W2) going into the A3 IF assembly at A3J2.
5. Connect a calibrated spectrum analyzer to this flexible gray cable (W2) and measure the 21.4 MHz output from the RF section.
If the RF section is operating properly, you should measure 21.4 MHz out of the
RF section at
21.4 MHz Third IF
Chapter 2 71
NOTE
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
If your signal amplitude is too high or too low, vary the input attenuation from 0 to
65 dB and note that for every 5 dB of attenuator change, the 21.4 MHz IF output signal from the RF section should change 5 dB as well. The signal amplitude problem may be the result of a defective A8A5 input attenuator or the attenuator logic from A8A1A1 Reference/Third Converter.
• If you notice a frequency response problem, visually inspect the RF input connector for mechanical integrity.
• If the analyzer has a frequency response problem you can inject the frequency of interest, tune the analyzer to that frequency in zero span, and monitor the
21.4 MHz IF signal level for abnormalities on your calibrated spectrum analyzer.
•
If you have excessive loss through the RF section, see “Detailed RF
Troubleshooting for Low Band” on page 73 to isolate the defective assembly.
72 Chapter 2
NOTE
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
Detailed RF Troubleshooting for Low Band
1. Inject a 50 MHz CW signal at
20 dBm into the RF input of the analyzer.
2. Tune the analyzer to 50 MHz, zero span, with input attenuation set to 0 dB by pressing FREQUENCY , Center Freq , 50 MHz , SPAN , Zero Span ,
Attenuation Auto Man (Man), 0 dB .
3. Turn Auto Align On/Off to Off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align ,
Off .
With an input frequency of 50 MHz, the A8A6 YTF/Mixer (RYTHM) assembly is internally bypassed using switching PIN diodes. The switching logic for the PIN diodes comes from the A7A4 Frequency Extension assembly. The 1st LO from the
A8A4 LO Amp/IF Switch assembly is turned off, since the mixer portion of A8A6 is not used in low band (frequencies < 3.0 GHz).
With the analyzer settings stated above, use a calibrated spectrum analyzer to
measure the following signals in Table 2-2 .
To isolate the failing assembly, refer to Table 2-2 and
to measure the troubleshooting points throughout the RF section. The
Measurement Location column of the table corresponds to the locations called out on the drawing and the block diagram. The Expected Measured Signal column references figures that illustrate the signal expected at that measurement point.
Chapter 2 73
Table 2-2
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
RF Section Low Band Troubleshooting Points
Signal
Description
1st IF Output
2nd IF Output
RF Input
1st LO Output
2nd LO Input
Measurement
Location
A
D
E
B
C a
Expected
Frequency
3921.4 MHz
321.4 MHz
50 MHz
3971.4 MHz
600 MHz
Expected
Level
23.2 dBm
27.5 dBm
20.5 dBm
1 dBm
3 to +6 dBm
Expected
Measured
Signal b
Notes
A8A1A2 has ~3.2 dB of loss.
A8A2 has ~4.5 dB of loss.
Out of A8A3
Out of A8A1A2
Out of A8A1A1 (through
A7A9 with Option 120)
Out of A8A2J5
LO Test Port
2nd LO
Multiplied
F
Block Diagram only
3600 MHz
13.5 dBm
600 MHz TG G 600 MHz -7 dBm
Out of A8A1A1
10 MHz
Reference
H 10 MHz +5 dBm
50 MHz
Calibrator
I 50 MHz
20 dBm
a. To locate the measurement points, refer to
.
b. To see the signal expected at each measurement location, reference the figures in this column.
Rear Panel 10 MHz
Ref. Out
Out of A8A1A1
74 Chapter 2
Figure 2-17
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
RF Section Low Band Troubleshooting Points
Chapter 2 75
Figure 2-18
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
RF Section Low Band Block Diagram E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B
76 Chapter 2
Figure 2-19
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
1st IF Output
A8A1A2J3
Figure 2-20 321.4 MHz 2nd IF Output
A8A2
Chapter 2 77
Figure 2-21
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
RF Input
Figure 2-22 1st LO Output
A8A1A2J5
78 Chapter 2
Figure 2-23
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
600 MHz 2nd LO
A8A1A1P1
Figure 2-24 3600 MHz A8A2J5 LO Test Port
Chapter 2 79
Figure 2-25
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
600 MHz BITG Output
A8A1A1P3
Figure 2-26 10 MHz Reference Output
A8A1A1
80 Chapter 2
Figure 2-27
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
50 MHz Cal Out Signal
Quick Check RF Procedure for High Bands (Preselected)
1. Inject a 4.7 GHz CW signal at –10 dBm into the RF input of the analyzer.
2. Tune the analyzer to 4.7 GHz, zero span, input attenuation set to 0 dB by pressing FREQUENCY , Center Freq , 4.7 GHz , SPAN , Zero Span ,
Attenuation Auto Man (Man), 0 dB .
3. Turn Auto Align On/Off to Off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align ,
Off .
4. Disconnect the flexible gray cable (W2) going into the A3 IF assembly at A3J2.
5. Connect a calibrated spectrum analyzer to this flexible gray cable (W2) and measure the 21.4 MHz output from the RF section.
6. If the RF section is operating properly, you should measure 21.4 MHz out of
the RF section at –10 dBm. See Figure 2-28 .
Chapter 2 81
Figure 2-28
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
21.4 MHz Output - From A8A1A1 to A3
NOTE If your signal amplitude is too high or too low, vary the input attenuation from 0 to
65 dB and note that for every 5 dB of attenuator change, the 21.4 MHz IF output signal from the RF section should change 5 dB as well. The signal amplitude problem may be the result of a defective A8A5 input attenuator or the attenuator logic from A8A1A1 Reference/Third Converter.
• If you notice a frequency response problem, visually inspect the RF input connector for mechanical integrity.
• If the analyzer has a frequency response problem you can inject the frequency of interest, tune the analyzer to that frequency in zero span, and monitor the
21.4 MHz IF signal level for abnormalities on your calibrated spectrum analyzer.
•
If you have excessive loss through the RF section, see “Detailed RF
Troubleshooting for Low Band” on page 73 to isolate the defective assembly.
82 Chapter 2
NOTE
Table 2-3
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
Detailed RF Troubleshooting for High Bands (Preselected)
To isolate the failing assembly, refer to Table 2-4 and
to measure the troubleshooting points throughout the RF section. The
Measurement Location column of the table corresponds to the locations called out on the drawing and the block diagram. The Expected Measured Signal column references figures that illustrate the signal expected at that measurement point.
1. Inject a 4.7 GHz CW signal at –10 dBm into the RF input of the analyzer.
2. Tune the analyzer to 4.7 GHz, zero span, input attenuation set to 0 dB by pressing FREQUENCY , Center Freq , 4.7 GHz , SPAN , Zero Span ,
Attenuation Auto Man (Man), 0 dB .
3. Turn Auto Align On/Off to Off by pressing System , Alignments , Auto Align ,
Off .
With the analyzer settings stated in the above steps, use a calibrated spectrum
analyzer to measure the signals in Table 2-4 .
The 1st LO originating from the A8A1A2 LO board is heavily attenuated in the
A8A4 LO Amp/ IF switch assembly when the analyzer is tuned to frequencies below ~3200 MHz. During this time the A8A6 YTF/Mixer assembly is internally and electronically bypassed.
However, when the analyzer is tuned higher than ~3200 MHz, the A8A6
YTF/Mixer assembly is used for down conversion and therefore, high LO power is supplied to the A8A6 YTF/Mixer for conversion efficiency. During this time the
A8A4 LO Amp/IF switch is amplifying the 1st LO.
The 1st LO modulator drive voltage originates on the A7A4 Frequency Extension board. Before changing the A8A6 YTF/Mixer assembly or the A8A4 LO Amp/IF switch, first verify the switching logic as per
.
A8A6 YTF/Mixer Switching Logic
Measurement Location
A7A4J2 pin 9
A7A4J2 pin 20
A7A4J2 pin 21
Frequencies
< 3200 MHz
0 V
5 V
0 V
Frequencies
> 3200 MHz
5 V
0 V
0 V
Chapter 2 83
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
RF Section High Band Troubleshooting Points Table 2-4
Signal
Description
Measurement
Location a
Expected
Frequency
Expected
Level
Expected
Measured
Signal b
Notes
1st IF Output
1st IF Output
A
B
321.4 MHz
321.4 MHz
22.5 dBm
16 dBm
A8A6 has ~12 dB of loss.
A8A4 amplifies the 321.4 MHz
IF by ~6.5 dB.
Out of A8A1A2 1st LO Output Refer to
location D
3971.4 MHz
2 dBm
1st LO Output D 3521.4 MHz +14 dBm
Out of A8A4 in high bands
ONLY. LOIS amplifies the input by ~16 dB
TG LO Output
External 1st
LO Output
E
F
3971.4 MHz
3971.4 MHz
2 dBm
+12.5 dBm
Misc. Signal out of A8A4 used for option 1DN.
Output of A8A4. Used for
a. To locate the measurement points, refer to Figure 2-29
and
b. To see the signal expected at each measurement location, reference the figures in this column.
external mixing.
84 Chapter 2
Figure 2-29
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
RF Section High Band Troubleshooting Points
Chapter 2 85
Figure 2-30
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
RF Section High Band Block Diagram E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B
86 Chapter 2
Figure 2-31
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
321.4 MHz IF High Band
A8A6J1
Figure 2-32 321.4 MHz Internal IF
A8A4J7
Chapter 2 87
Figure 2-33
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
1st LO
A8A1A2J5
Figure 2-34 High Band LO - A8A4J2
88 Chapter 2
Figure 2-35
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
Tracking Generator 1st LO - A8A4J4
Figure 2-36 External 1st LO Output - A8A4
Chapter 2 89
Troubleshooting the RF Section
Verifying the RF Section Performance (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B)
90 Chapter 2
3
Block Diagrams
Chapter 3 91
Block Diagrams
What You Will Find in This Chapter
What You Will Find in This Chapter
This chapter provides information about the operation of the analyzer that is useful when first troubleshooting a failure. Refer to the appropriate overall block diagram at the end of this chapter when reading the assembly descriptions that follow.
These figures show all major assemblies in the analyzer.
The ESA series spectrum analyzers are microprocessor-controlled swept receivers with frequency ranges from 9 kHz to 1.5 GHz, 3.0 GHz, 6.5 GHz, 13.2 GHz, or
26.5 GHz, depending on the model number. This chapter briefly describes each of the following analyzer assemblies:
•
“A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly” on page 93
•
“A8 RF Assembly” on page 97 which includes:
—
“A8J10 Input Connector” on page 98
—
“A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly” on page 98
—
“A8A1A1 Reference/Third Converter” on page 99
—
“A8A1A2 Front End/LO” on page 99
—
“A8A2 Second Converter” on page 100
—
—
“A8A4 LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS)” on page 100
—
“A8A5 Input Attenuator” on page 101
—
“A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM)” on page 101
—
“A8FL1 3.1 GHz Low-Pass Filter (LPF)” on page 101
—
“A7A4 Frequency Extension” on page 101
•
•
“A4 Processor Assembly” on page 104
•
“A5 Power Supply Assembly” on page 108
•
“A1 Display/Front Panel” on page 110
All of the board assemblies listed above are connected to the serial digital interface through the motherboard connection. All data and control information and all power supplies, are distributed through these connections. Each of these board assemblies has its own individual EEPROM with stored serial numbers and alignment data for the board.
The assemblies listed below do not have individual EEPROMs and are not connected to the serial digital interface.
•
•
“A6 Speaker/Floppy Board Assembly” on page 110
92 Chapter 3
CAUTION
Block Diagrams
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
(E4401B and E4411B)
The A8 RF assembly performs the following major functions:
• Provides input protection
• Provides input attenuation
• Converts RF input signals to the 21.4 MHz IF
• Generates first and second local oscillator (LO) signals for down-conversion
• Uses a fractional-N phase-locked loop for first LO stability
• Generates a 10 MHz reference signal
• Generates an internal 50 MHz amplitude reference signal and a 21.4 MHz IF alignment signal
The RF section uses a two-stage frequency conversion to convert RF signals to the
21.4 MHz final IF.
Input Connector
The input connector is mounted directly on the RF assembly. This connector can be easily replaced without disassembling the RF section. Refer to
removal procedure.
Input Protection
Exposing the analyzer to high levels of input power over a prolonged time period can damage the circuitry.
The analyzer input circuitry can be damaged by power levels that exceed the maximum safe input level specifications. Refer to the analyzer specifications for the exact values.
Some input protection is provided by a dc-blocking capacitor after the input connector. The input relay that switches between input signals and an internal
50 MHz alignment signal also functions as an overload protection switch. The relay is driven by an overload detector that has two power trip points. When the input attenuation is less than 15 dB, the trip point is approximately +13 dBm
(68 dBmV with Option 1DP) to protect the mixer. When the input attenuation is
15 dB or greater, the trip point is set to approximately +33 dBm (76 dBmV with
Option 1DP) to protect the attenuator.
Chapter 3 93
Block Diagrams
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
During an overload condition, the input signal will still be displayed, but at a lower amplitude. This condition is accompanied by a message displayed on screen informing the operator of the overload. Refer to the user’s guide for your analyzer for information on how to clear the overload condition.
Attenuator
The input attenuator provides 0 to 60 dB of attenuation in 5 dB steps. To select
10 dB attenuation, press Preset .
Low-Pass Filter
The input signal passes through a 1.5 GHz low-pass filter (LPF) to eliminate unwanted signals above 1.5 GHz.
First Mixer
The first mixer converts incoming signals to a 2.4214 GHz first IF by mixing the input signal with a 2.4214 to 3.9214 GHz first local oscillator (LO). This LO is derived by tripling the output from an 800 to 1308 MHz fractional-N phase-locked loop (PLL) synthesizer.
First IF Amplifier/Filter/Attenuator
The overall gain of the front end is set by the digital-to-analog converter
(DAC)-controlled RF variable gain amplifier. The variable gain amplifier has an input LPF, input attenuator, amplifier, output attenuator, and an output LPF. The
LPFs provide rejection of harmonics of the LO in order to attenuate unwanted spurious signals. The two attenuators control the approximately 30 dB of available gain. This range is used to provide an overall gain of 0 dB from the RF input to the
21.4 MHz output to the IF assembly.
Second Mixer
The second mixer converts the 2.4214 GHz first IF to a 21.4 MHz second and final
IF, by mixing it with a 2.4 GHz second LO. The second LO is derived by tripling the frequency of an 800 MHz voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO).
94 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
21.4 MHz Amplifier
The 21.4 MHz amplifier has 3 functions:
• A bandpass filter (BPF) at the input, to reject signals at 10.7 MHz
• An amplifier, with a typical gain of 12 dB
• A PIN switch circuit, to switch between the IF and the 21.4 MHz IF alignment signal that is generated by the first LO
Frequency Reference
The 10 MHz voltage-controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO) frequency reference is used to phase-lock the 800 to 1308 MHz PLL first LO, and the 800 MHz PLL second LO. It is also used for synchronization with the processor assembly for the analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
An optional oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO) is also available on the
E4401B as option 1D5. Option 1D5 adds a small board, A8A1 OCXO, to the basic
A8 RF assembly. Cables interconnect A8A1 to A8.
LO
First LO
The 2.4214 to 3.9214 GHz first LO signal is derived from an 800 to 1308 MHz
PLL synthesized signal that is tripled by a diode tripler/filter.
This first LO multiplier consists of three tripler/filter paths that are selected by PIN diode switches. Each path contains its own tripler/filter and the appropriate signal path is switched-in based on the desired LO frequency. The three paths are identical except for the range of their bandpass filters.
The output of the tripler is bandpass-filtered to remove the harmonics, and then sent to the output switch. It is then amplified with a limiting amplifier, before going to the first LO amplifier to drive the input mixer.
For frequency sweeps that cross over more than one path range, the two adjacent paths are enabled simultaneously during band crossings to produce a
“make-before-break” type of switching action. This action is controlled by the system processor to avoid first LO power drop outs.
The first LO generates the 21.4 MHz IF alignment signal by dividing the PLL output by 40 and bandpass filtering the divided-down signal.
Chapter 3 95
Block Diagrams
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
Second LO
The 2.4 GHz second LO signal and the 50 MHz alignment signal are both synthesized from the 800 MHz VCO that is phase-locked to the 10 MHz reference.
The 2.4 GHz signal is derived by multiplying the 800 MHz signal with the use of a tripler/filter path similar to the one used to generate the first LO signal. The
50 MHz amplitude reference signal is derived by dividing the 800 MHz signal by
16.
A8A1 OCXO (Option 1D5)
The A8A1 OCXO (oven-controlled crystal oscillator) provides improved frequency accuracy and stability. A8A1 receives power and control via A8J2. The
OCXO output is fed back to A8 via A8J4.
Interconnections to Other Assemblies
The A8 RF assembly has three external connectors, (two at the rear of the analyzer and one at the front). It also has seven internal connectors, (four on the top of the board, two on the bottom, and one on the bandpass filter (BPF) cavity).
A8J10
A8J12
A8J3
A8J11
RF Input (front external port)
EXT REF IN - accepts an external frequency source to provide the 10 MHz,
15 to +10 dBm frequency reference used by the analyzer. (rear external port)
21.4 MHz IF output to the A3 IF Assembly (internal)
A8J5
EXT REF OUT - provides a 10 MHz, 0 dBm minimum, time-based reference signal. (rear external port)
First LO VCO test port (internal)
A8J6
A8J13
A8J4
A8J2
Second LO VCO test port (internal)
BPF alignment port (internal)
OCXO 10 MHz REF INPUT from A8A1
OCXO (A8A1) power and control (Option 1D5)
Unused
A8J7 (internal)
96 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A8 RF Assembly
A8 RF Assembly
(E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
The A8 RF assembly performs the following major functions:
• Provides input attenuation
• Provides tracking preselection when tuned above 2.85 GHz
• Converts RF input signals to the 21.4 MHz IF
• Generates first, second and third local oscillator (LO) signals for up-conversion and down-conversion
• Uses a fractional-N phase-locked loop for first LO stability
• Generates a 10 MHz reference signal
• Generates a 50 MHz amplitude reference signal, and an internal 21.4 MHz IF alignment signal
• Provides an auxiliary first LO output and a 600 MHz signal to drive the optional 3.0 GHz tracking generator
When tuned below 3.0 GHz, the RF section up-converts the signal to a 3.9214 GHz first IF, and then down-converts it to a 321.4 MHz second IF, and finally to a 21.4
MHz third IF. When tuned above 3.0 GHz, the RF section down-converts the signal directly to the 321.4 MHz second IF and then to the 21.4 MHz third IF.
The RF Section consists of four board assemblies, and three microcircuits. Two of the board assemblies (A8A1A1 and A8A1A2) comprise the A8A1 3.0 GHz RF
Assembly. Not all microcircuits and board assemblies are used in every model.
Refer to the following table.
Chapter 3 97
Block Diagrams
A8 RF Assembly
Description E4402B and
E4403B
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly
(includes A8A1A1 and A8A1A2)
A8A1A1 Reference/Third Converter (part of
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly)
A8A1A2 Front End/LO
(part of A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly)
A8A2 Second Converter
A8A3 DC Block
A8A4 LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS)
A8A5 Input Attenuator
A8A5 Input Attenuator with Switchable dc Block
A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM)
A8FL1 3.1 GHz Low-Pass Filter (LPF)
A7A4 Frequency Extension
X
X
X
X
X
X
(Option UKB) only
X
E4404B and
E4405B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E4407B and
E4408B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(Option UKB) only
X
X
X
A8J10 Input Connector
The input connector is mounted to the middle shield of the 3.0 GHz RF assembly.
This connector can be easily replaced without disassembling the RF section. Refer to
Chapter 6 for the removal procedure.
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly
The A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly is comprised of two boards, the A8A1A1
Reference/Third Converter and the A8A1A2 Front End/LO, in the same shield set.
The A8J10 input connector and the Amptd Ref Out connector (part of the
A8A1W4 50 MHz Amptd Ref Signal), also mount to A8A1. Refer to the following descriptions for
“A8A1A1 Reference/Third Converter” and “A8A1A2 Front
98 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A8 RF Assembly
A8A1A1 Reference/Third Converter
(Part of the A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly)
The standard frequency reference is a 10 MHz VCXO. Option 1D5 adds on oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO). The frequency reference is used to phase-lock a 100 MHz VCXO. This 100 MHz signal is divided by two to yield the
50 MHz amplitude reference signal, and is tripled to provide the 300 MHz third
LO.
The 300 MHz third LO is then doubled to yield a 600 MHz signal which is the reference for the first LO and will be used by the A8A2 Second Converter to generate the 3.6 GHz second LO.
The second IF amplifiers provide approximately 24 dB of gain. There is also a
400 MHz low-pass filter and a 321.4 MHz bandpass filter before the third mixer.
The third mixer is an active mixer, which includes an IF amplifier. The third mixer down-converts from 321.4 MHz to 21.4 MHz. A variable gain stage, controlled by a DAC, follows the third mixer. The gain is set to provide
10 dBm output at
A8A1A1P5 when a
10 dBm signal is applied to the analyzer input with 0 dB input attenuation.
The third IF amplifier is followed by a switch to allow the 21.4 MHz alignment signal from A8A1A2 to be routed to the A3 IF Assembly for performing automatic
IF alignments between sweeps. Either the output of the third amplifier or the
21.4 MHz alignment signal is routed to the A3 IF Assembly.
A8A1A1 also provides power and control signals for the A8A5 Input Attenuator and the A8A2 Second Converter.
A8A1A2 Front End/LO
(Part of the A8A1 3.0 GHz RF Assembly)
A limiter at the A8A1A2 input protects the first mixer from excessive RF signals.
A switch following the limiter allows the 50 MHz amplitude reference signal to be switched-in to perform automatic RF alignments. A preamplifier (available as
Option 1DS on E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B analyzers) can be switched-in just before the first mixer. The first mixer is an active mixer with
LO and IF amplifiers. A 700 MHz wide bandpass filter follows the first mixer. The variable gain first IF amplifier corrects for conversion losses in the front end.
Chapter 3 99
Block Diagrams
A8 RF Assembly
The first LO uses a YIG-tuned oscillator in a fractional-N phase-locked loop
(PLL). The 600 MHz reference from A8A1A1 is divided by 128 or 129 dual-modulus prescaler and the resulting ~4.66 MHz signal is used as the reference for the fractional-N PLL. The 21.4 MHz alignment signal is generated by dividing the first LO signal by 64 and then limiting the divided signal. The first LO signal drives a series of three directional couplers. The first directional coupler is used to drive an ALC loop to level the first LO signal. The second directional coupler provides feedback for the fractional-N PLL. The last directional coupler provides an auxiliary first LO output for driving either the optional 3.0 GHz tracking generator or the A8A4 LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS), which then provides a first
LO signal for the A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM).
A8A2 Second Converter
The A8A2 Second Converter down-converts the 3.9214 GHz first IF to a 321.4
MHz second IF. In high band, it passes the 321.4 MHz first IF from A8A4
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B) to the A8A1A1 Reference/Third
Converter. The converter generates a 3.6 GHz second LO by multiplying a 600
MHz reference. Bandpass filters remove unwanted harmonics of the 600 MHz driving signal. First IF and second LO signals are filtered by cavity filters, which are not user adjustable.
A8A3 dc Block
The dc block protects the input circuitry. It begins to roll off below 9 kHz, the low frequency limit of the analyzers. A8A3 is not present in analyzers with
Option UKB.
A8A4 LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS)
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
The A8A4 LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS) amplifies the auxiliary LO output from
A8A1A2 and levels the output, as necessary, to provide the optimum first LO amplitudes to the A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM). An output is also provided to drive the A2 3.0 GHz tracking generator (Option 1DN). An additional levelled output is available for External Mixing (Option AYZ).
The IF switch routes the 321.4 MHz IF signal from A8A6 and amplifies it before passing it along to the A8A7 Second Converter. The IF switch also allows for an external 321.4 MHz IF input. A dc bias can be applied to the external IF input signal.
The A8A4 LO Amplifier/IF Switch is controlled by the A7A4 Frequency
Extension assembly.
100 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A8 RF Assembly
A8A5 Input Attenuator
The input attenuator provides 0 to 65 dB of attenuation in 5 dB steps. The attenuator in the E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B with Option UKB also includes a dc block which can be switched out. With the dc block switched in, the analyzer can make measurements as low as 100 kHz (10 MHz for E4407B with
Option UKB). With the dc block switched out, the analyzer can make measurements as low as 9 kHz (100 Hz for Option UKB). Pressing Preset selects
10 dB attenuation and, for analyzers with a switchable dc block, switches in the dc block.
A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer (RYTHM)
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
The A8A6 RYTHM (Routing YIG-Tuned Harmonic Mixer) is a microcircuit which combines an RF switch, a tracking preselector, and a high-band mixer. The
PIN diode switch directs the RF input to the appropriate mixer in the A8A6 or the
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF assembly.
The tracking preselector is a YIG-tuned filter. It functions as a tunable bandpass filter for high-band signals (2.85 GHz to either 6.5, 13.2, or 26.5 GHz). The preselector’s tuned frequency is controlled by DACs on the A7A4 Frequency
Extension assembly.
The high-band mixer is ac coupled. It uses the first, second, and fourth harmonics of the first LO to mix with the incoming signals to cover the frequency range.
A8FL1 3.1 GHz Low-Pass Filter (LPF)
The A8FL1 3.1 GHz LPF precedes the 3.0 GHz RF assembly to eliminate image and out-of-band responses when in low-band. When in low-band, only signals greater than 3.1 GHz can generate image and out-of-band responses. By filtering out these signals, image and out-of-band responses are virtually eliminated.
A7A4 Frequency Extension
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
The A7A4 Frequency Extension provides power and control signals to the A8A4
LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS) and the A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer
(RYTHM). A DAC on A7A4 is used to control the amplitude of LO outputs on the
A8A4. A variable-rate generator and sweep clock drive DACs, which control the tuning of the preselector and the A8A6. Several drivers are provided to control the
PIN diode switches on A8A4 and A8A6. A DAC also provides bias to the high-band mixer in A8A6.
The flatness correction data for high-band is stored on A7A4.
Chapter 3 101
Block Diagrams
A3 IF Assembly
A3 IF Assembly
The A3 IF assembly uses combined crystal and LC filters to process 21.4 MHz input signals and create a video output signal.
The IF assembly provides the following main functions:
• Resolution bandwidth filtering
• Step gain amplification
• Log amplification
• Linear detection
• Frequency counter prescaling
• Down-conversion to 8.5 kHz for narrow bandwidths (Option 1DR).
Cal Attenuator
The Cal Attenuator has 0 to 49 dB of attenuation (in 7 dB steps) to provide gain range for the log amplifier alignment. The attenuator is switched on only as part of
IF alignment, not during any normal analyzer sweeps.
21.4 MHz Bandpass Filters
The 21.4 MHz IF filters are a series of four pole, synchronously-tuned combined crystal and LC filters with adjustable gain and bypass switches.
Nine IF bandwidths, from 1 kHz to 5 MHz, can be selected in a 1, 3, 10 sequence.
There are also 9 kHz and 120 kHz 6 dB bandwidths for EMC measurements.
The resolution bandwidths are normally coupled to the center frequency of the analyzer. Sweep time is also coupled to both resolution bandwidth and span for optimum amplitude response. The resolution bandwidth, sweep time, and span can be set independently.
Log Detector
The log detector displays the input signal logarithmically due to the successive detection log amplifier that has an overall range of 85 dB.
In log mode, the default vertical amplitude unit is dBm, (dB relative to a milliwatt) rather than volts. (The default vertical amplitude unit is dBmV with Option 1DP.)
Linear Detector
The input signal can be displayed in linear mode, so that the vertical deflection on the screen is directly proportional to the voltage of the input signal.
102 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A3 IF Assembly
Interconnections to Other Assemblies
A3J2 Unfiltered 21.4 MHz input on SMB cable from the A8 RF assembly at
10 dBm nominal level corresponding to a full scale (top of screen) output video level of 2 V
• Filtered 21.4 MHz output to A7A1 (option A4J) at +10 dBm nominal level corresponding to a full scale (top of screen) input of
10 dBm
• Video output, nominally 0 V at bottom of screen and 2 V at top of screen
• Frequency counter output, differential output 100 mV at 10.7 MHz
Downconverter
The narrow bandwidths (Res BW
300 Hz) are implemented digitally using digital signal processing performed by the CPU. The narrow bandwidths are only available in ESA models with Option 1DR.
The downconverter mixes the 21.4 MHz IF signal with the 21.4 MHz
(approximately) VCXO signal to yield an 8.5 kHz IF. This 8.5 kHz signal is bandpass-filtered. The 8.5 kHz video signal is digitized by the ADC on the A4 processor assembly.
Chapter 3 103
Block Diagrams
A4 Processor Assembly
A4 Processor Assembly
The A4 processor assembly provides the following main functions:
• Main CPU processing
• Memory, including boot memory and firmware
• Video filtering
• Peak detection
• Analog-to-digital conversion of the video output from A3
• Real-time clock
• IF counters
• Communicates with I/O assemblies
• Front panel interface
• LCD interface
• Digital signal processing for digitally-implemented narrow resolution bandwidths (Option 1DR).
Analog Section
The analog section of the processor assembly controls all video processing. The analog section includes the input mux, video filter, peak detector, and analog-to-digital conversion circuitry.
Input Multiplexers
There are two input multiplexers on the processor assembly. MUX A selects which signal passes through the video filters to the peak detectors. MUX B selects which signal is digitized by the analog-to-digital converter.
Video Filters
There are 10 video filter bandwidths in the video section of the processor assembly. They are simple low-pass RC filters created by switching one of five different capacitors and one of two different resistors into the system. The video filters range from 1 MHz to 30 Hz in a 1, 3, 10 sequence in 10 steps.
Peak Detectors
There are two peak detectors on the processor assembly. The positive peak detector saves the maximum value reached between measurement buckets. The negative peak detector saves the minimum value reached between measurement buckets.
104 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A4 Processor Assembly
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
The analog-to-digital converter on the processor assembly has a 0 to +2 V range and uses a 12 bit conversion for normal measurements. This results in a vertical resolution of approximately 0.05 dB in log mode and 0.05% of reference level in linear mode.
Temperature Sensor
The processor assembly has an on-board temperature sensor to give the firmware the ability to determine when the analyzer should be realigned due to temperature changes.
Audio
There is an audio line on the motherboard that goes to the speaker assembly installed in the analyzer. A signal is sent to the audio line in order for it to be heard through the speaker or headphone jack. The processor has the ability to put two different signals onto the AUDIO line. The first is the AUX_VIDEO line; this is the signal going through the video filters. The second is the CPU_SOUND line, which is currently unused.
Real-Time Clock
The real-time clock uses a 32 kHz crystal to keep track of the time and date. It has battery backup from the same battery and controller as the SRAM. The real-time clock and the display controller each have their own separate timers.
IF Count
The processor counts the IF divided by two (10.7 MHz) to determine precisely where the analyzer is tuned. This is used for the frequency counter function.
Analyzer Battery Information
The analyzers use a single 3 V lithium battery to enable the internal memory to retain data. The date that the battery was installed is displayed on a label on the rear panel of the analyzer. See
.
The minimum life expectancy of the battery is seven years at 25
C. If you experience problems with the battery, or the recommended time period for battery
replacement has elapsed see, “Contacting Agilent Technologies” on page 241 .
Chapter 3 105
Figure 3-1
Block Diagrams
A4 Processor Assembly
If you wish to replace the battery yourself, refer to the
“A4MAU58 Battery” on page 286 replacement procedure in
. The battery is mounted onto the analyzer processor board. If the battery fails or the battery connection is broken, the real-time clock stops and all data stored in RAM is lost. This data will need to be restored after the battery is replaced. The following are examples of the data types that will need to be restored:
• GPIB address (Option A4H) or RS-232 baud rate (Option 1AX)
• Current correction factors (factory correction factors are stored on each assembly)
• Any current limit lines, and correction tables
• Any customized analyzer settings like display contrast, etc.
After replacing the analyzer battery, write the date of battery replacement on the rear panel label.
Rear Panel Battery Information Label
!
PROCESSOR
BATTERY LIFE
7 YEARS AT 25 C
INSTALLED
sl79b
Interconnections to Other Assemblies
There are four connectors to the rear panel:
A4J7 VGA OUTPUT - drives an external VGA-compatible monitor with a signal that has 31.5 kHz horizontal, 60 Hz vertical synchronizing rate, non-interlaced.
A4J1
A4J8
A4J9
(service connector for factory use only)
GATE TRIG/EXT TRIG IN (TTL) - accepts the positive edge of an external voltage input that triggers the analyzer internal sweep source.
GATE/HI SWP OUT (TTL) - indicates when the analyzer is sweeping.
106 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A4 Processor Assembly
The following front panel interface connector contains the signals and voltages for all front panel circuitry:
• Power supplies.
• Rotary pulse generator (RPG) interface. There are two RPGs; one for the active function and one for volume.
• Front panel keyboard interface.
• AT keyboard interface. An AT-style PC keyboard can be plugged into the front panel.
• LCD digital interface. The display controller for the processor assembly can drive an LCD (internal) and a VGA (external) CRT simultaneously.
• Front panel serial interface. This is used to communicate with the front panel of the analyzer.
• Probe power unfiltered supply (+15 V and
15 V supplies). The 15 V supply is converted to
12.6 V on the front panel interface board for the probe power connector.
A4A1 Flash SIMM
The A4A1 Flash SIMM provides additional memory for firmware enhancements such as downloadable programs. A 4 Mbyte Flash SIMM is standard. Option B72 replaces the 4 Mbyte Flash SIMM with a 32 Mbyte Flash SIMM.
A4A2 DRAM SIMM
The A4A2 DRAM SIMM provides additional memory for storing traces, states, limitlines, and amplitude correction (“ampcor”) sets. A 16 Mbyte DRAM is standard. Option B72 replaces the 16 Mbyte DRAM with a 32 Mbyte DRAM.
Chapter 3 107
NOTE
Block Diagrams
A5 Power Supply Assembly
A5 Power Supply Assembly
The A5 power supply assembly can be powered by a 90 to 140 volt or 200 to 264 volt ac supply, or an external 12 to 22 Vdc supply. It supplies the analyzer with all of the supply voltages listed below. The line module, line fuse, and the dc power connector and dc fuse are all part of the power supply assembly. Refer to the parts
list in Chapter 5 for the fuse types.
If the analyzer loses power for more than 30 seconds, the controller may not retain the power-on state (On or Off) selected by the operator. When power is restored, the analyzer will normally be Off. To set the analyzer to automatically turn On when power is applied, set the switch at the rear of the analyzer. This feature is especially useful under the following conditions:
• If the analyzer is in a rack with other analyzers, the entire rack can be turned on with a single switch.
• If the analyzer is operating unattended, you may want to have measurements continue after power is restored.
The fan is mounted directly to the power supply assembly. The fan speed varies with internal analyzer temperature; as the internal temperature increases, the fan speed also increases.
Because of safety concerns, the power supply is not repairable.
Interconnections to Other Assemblies
The following power supply connections can be made to other assemblies:
• +5 V, +15 V, +28 V,
5 V, and 15 V supplies to the power supply bus
• Voltage for the fan control
• Connector at the rear panel for a dc supply input
108 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
A7 Motherboard
A7 Motherboard
The A7 motherboard provides the power supply and digital bus interconnections between assemblies in the analyzer. Refer to
through
in this chapter for details on the motherboard connectors and mnemonics used.
Chapter 3 109
Block Diagrams
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
A1 Display/Front Panel
Display
The display is an LCD color flat screen with 640
480 VGA resolution. A connector for an external VGA display is available at the rear panel.
A1A1 Front Panel Interface Board
The A1A1 front panel interface board provides the interface between the display generation circuitry on the processor assembly and the display. It also interfaces the front panel keyboard to the processor assembly. Any display-specific voltages
(other than 5 V digital) are created on this board. The front panel interface board also includes the following:
• Main RPG
• Volume RPG
• Plug for external AT style PC keyboard
• Probe power (
12.6 Vdc, +15 Vdc, and ground)
• Circuits to digitally adjust the display
A1A2A2 Backlight Inverter Board
The backlight supply provides the high voltage to the two backlights in the LCD display.
A6 Speaker/Floppy Board Assembly
The speaker/floppy board assembly has an internal speaker and a front panel earphone jack which provides the capability to listen to a demodulated signal. The
3.5” floppy drive (A:) and the earphone jack can be accessed by opening the media door. The volume knob on the front panel controls the volume.
110 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
Table 3-1
Mnemonic
10 MHZ_AC
10 MHZ_TG
ACOM
AC_IF
AC_TRIG
ADC_SYNC
ANA_TST
AUDIO
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
Motherboard Mnemonics
AUX_VIDEO
CRD_ANLG1
CRD_ANLG2
CRD_ANLG3/7
Description
This is the 10 MHz reference from the RF section to the A7A1 and processor. It is terminated in 50
by the processor board. Signal: AC coupled 0.5 V peak to peak
Line Impedance: 50
This is the 10 MHz reference from the RF section to the tracking generator. It is terminated in 50
by the tracking generator board.
Signal: AC coupled 0.5 V peak to peak
Line Impedance: 50
Analog Common
Analog Card IF. An uncorrected, buffered IF signal from the output of the IF assembly.
Frequency: 21.4 MHz
Line Impedance: 50
Analog Card Trigger, provides trigger to system for option cards
(E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407).
A positive-going signal that indicates when the main ADC on the video/processor assembly has started an A/D conversion.
An analog signal from the RF section, tracking generator, or the analog card cage to the ADC of the video processor. When it is selected, the signal bypasses the video filter and peak detector sections.
Line Impedance: 50
AUDIO line to internal speaker
Line Impedance: 50
Auxiliary video: A detected video signal (0–2 V) that has passed through the video filters.
Line Impedance: 50
Card Analog 1 provides input to CPU for option cards (E4401B,
E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B).
Card Analog 2 provides input to CPU for option cards (E4401B,
E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B).
Provides option card interconnection (E4401B, E4402B, E4404B,
E4405B, and E4407B).
Chapter 3 111
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
Table 3-1 Motherboard Mnemonics (Continued)
Mnemonic
DCOM
DI_FREQ_CNT
DN_FREQ_CNT
HPUP_AC
HPUP_SYNC
HPUP_PS
HSWP_AC
HSWP_CNTRL
HWR_END_IO
H_SWEEP
IF_VIDEO
IO_A(16/0)
IO_D(15/0)
LADDR
LAS_IO
LCNTRL
LCS_HIGH_IO
LCS_IO
LDATA
LDS_IO
LDTACK_IO
LINE_TRIG
Description
A common ground for all digital circuitry.
Differential Inverted Frequency Count: 10.7 MHz signal from IF to processor to be counted for marker count function
Differential Non-Inverted Frequency Count: 10.7 MHz signal from IF to processor to be counted for marker count function
High = Processor Up Analog Card: This line will go high when power is applied and will go low before the supplies fully shut down.
(not used)
High = Processor Up Power Supply: This line will go high when power is applied and will go low before the supplies fully shut down.
High = Sweeping for analog card. A high indicates the analyzer is sweeping. (HC)
High = Sweep Control: This signal provides control for the analyzer display sweep and retrace.
High = Write_End. A signal that indicates the end of cycle for I/O card.
(TTL)
High = Sweep for RF and TG. A high indicates the analyzer is sweeping. (HC)
The detected 21.4 MHz IF signal from the detector on the IF assembly to the input multiplexer of the video processor.
Line Impedance: 50
I/O Address Lines
I/O Data Lines
Low = Address, serial bus strobe for address information
Low = Address strobe for I/O card. A TTL low indicates address valid
Low = Control, serial bus strobe for control information
Low = Chip select for High I/O
Low = Chip select for I/O card (TTL)
Low = Data, serial bus strobe for sending data
Low = Data strobe for I/O card (TTL)
Low = Data acknowledge for I/O card
TTL signal synchronous with AC line
112 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
Table 3-1
LI_IO_SLOW
LLW_IO
PS_OFF
PS_ON
PS_ID0
SCK
WLR_IO
X1
X2
N15
N5
P15
P28
P5
P5C
P5D
PS_COM
LOE_IO
LRESET_IO
LSRQ
LUW_IO
LWAIT_IO
MB_ID3/0
MISO
MOSI
Motherboard Mnemonics (Continued)
Mnemonic
LI_IO0/4
Description
Four Dedicated interrupt lines for I/O boards:
LI_IO0 is for the Speaker board (J20)
LI_IO1 is for Card Slot 1 (J21)
LI_IO2 is for Card Slot 2 (J22)
LI_IO3 is for Card Slot 3 (J23)
LI_IO4 is for Card Slot 3 (J24)
I/O Card Slow Interrupt
Low = Lower write, strobe for lower 8 bits
Low = output enable, strobe for reading data
Low = reset IO card (TTL)
Low Service Request
Low = Upper write, strobe for upper 8 bits
Low = wait_IO card, low extends bus cycle
(not used)
Master In Slave Out serial data
Master Out Slave In serial data
15 volts
5 volts
+15 volts
+28 volts
+5 volts
+5 volts Constant
+5 volts for Digital see PS_ON
(not used)
PS_ON line, when connected to PS_COM the analyzer will turn on
Power supply ID bit
Serial clock
Write Low Read
(not used)
(not used)
Chapter 3 113
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
Table 3-2
Mnemonic
10MHZ_AC
10MHZ_TG
ACOM
AC_IF
ADC_SYNC
ANA_TST
AUDIO
AUX_VIDEO
DCOM
DI_FREQ_CNT
DN_FREQ_CNT
HPUP_AC
HPUP_PS
HSWP_AC
HSWP_CNTRL
HWR_END_IO
H_SWEEP
Mnemonic Pin Locations
A7 Motherboard Connector
J1 J2 J4 J6 J7
J10 through
J16 a
J20
J21 through
J24 b
25-36,7
5-86
6-10,
12-15,
17-19,3
2-39
7, 9, 11,
13-17,1
9,20,
33-35,3
7-39
8-12,
58-62
34
40
18
36
3, 5, 7, 9,
11, 13, 15,
17,19-21,
23, 25, 27,
29, 31, 33,
35, 37, 39,
41, 43, 68,
69, 81, 93
56 52
(J11 to J16)
52
(J10 only)
1, 3-7,
9-11,13-15,
17-19,21-23
,
25-29,31,33,
35,37,
39-42,50,51,
53-55,57-67
,
69-71,73-77
, 90-92, 100
1-3, 5-7,
9-11,13-15,
17-19,21-232
5-27,29,3133
, 40, 48, 51,
53-55,
57-59,61-636
5-67,69-7173
-75,77-7990,
98
42, 43,
48-50, 92,
93, 98, 100
76
32
12
8
72
32
56
4
72
49, 99
1, 2, 7, 8, 51,
52, 57, 58
1, 5, 7, 9,
11, 13, 15,
17, 19, 21,
23, 25, 27,
29, 31, 33,
35, 37,
39-41, 66,
78
9, 11, 13, 15,
17, 19, 21-23,
25, 27, 29, 31,
33, 35, 37, 39,
41, 43, 45, 46,
50, 72, 73, 85
20
40
11
52
2
36 34
2 49
81
80
81
(J11 to J16)
80
8 38 10
8 79 81
(J10 only)
114 Chapter 3
Table 3-2
Mnemonic
IO_A(15)
IO_A(16)
IO_D(0)
IO_D(1)
IO_D(2)
IO_D(3)
IO_D(4)
IO_D(5)
IO_D(6)
IO_D(7)
IO_D(8)
IO_D(9)
IO_D(10)
IO_A(7)
IO_A(8)
IO_A(9)
IO_A(10)
IO_A(11)
IO_A(12)
IO_A(13)
IO_A(14)
IF_VIDEO
IO_A(0)
IO_A(1)
IO_A(2)
IO_A(3)
IO_A(4)
IO_A(5)
IO_A(6)
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
J1
Mnemonic Pin Locations (Continued)
J2
16
J4
42
90
89
40
71
70
92
91
88
87
38
86
85
24
73
72
22
76
26
75
74
79
78
28
77
32
80
30
J6
A7 Motherboard Connector
J7
24
J10 through
J16 a
24
J20
J21 through
J24 b
6
57
58
8
76
77
55
56
59
60
10
61
62
24
74
75
26
71
22
72
73
68
69
20
70
16
67
18
44
94
93
42
75
74
96
95
92
91
40
90
89
26
77
76
24
80
28
79
78
83
82
30
81
34
84
32
Chapter 3 115
Table 3-2
Mnemonic
IO_D(11)
IO_D(12)
IO_D(13)
IO_D(14)
IO_D(15)
LADDR
LAS_IO
LCNTRL
LCS_IO
LDATA
LDS_IO
LDTACK_IO
LINE_TRIG
LI_IO0
LI_IO1
LI_IO2
LI_IO3
LI_IO4
LI_IO_SLOW
LLW_IO
LOE_IO
LRESET_IO
LSRQ
LUW_IO
LWAIT_IO
MISO
MOSI
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
J1
95
99
97
Mnemonic Pin Locations (Continued)
J2
26
30
28
J4
27
31
29
36
84
83
34
82
J6
A7 Motherboard Connector
J7
J10 through
J16 a
89 89
14
85 85
10
87 87
62
J20
12
63
64
14
65
32
36
84
87
50 38
6
55
54
4
53
56
63
60
61
91
90
83
86
85
49 12 82 82
64
58
82
88
100
98
31
29
32
30
84
86
84
86
J21 through
J24 b
38
88
87
36
86
16
12
66
63
68
62
59
(J21 only)
59
(J22 only)
59
(J23 only)
59
(J24 only)
60
67
64
65
116 Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
Table 3-2 Mnemonic Pin Locations (Continued)
A7 Motherboard Connector
Mnemonic
J1 J2 J4 J6 J7
J10 through
J16 a
N15
N5
P15
P28
P5
39-44
89-94
37-38
87-88
17-22
67-72
23, 24
73, 74
13-16
63-66
5, 25
4, 24
2, 22
3, 23
6, 26
5, 25
2, 22
1, 21
3, 23
43, 44
93, 94
45, 95
47, 48
97, 98
49, 99
46, 96
41, 91
42, 92
45, 46
95, 96
47, 97
43, 44
93, 94
P5C
P5D
PS_COM
PS_ON
PS_ID0
SCK
WLR_IO
3-7
53-57
52
1
45
96
1, 21
27
4, 24
28
44-48
94-98
99
50
88
50, 100
88
12 a. J13, J14, and J15 are not loaded on ESA-L Series motherboards.
b. J23, J24, J25, and J26 are not loaded on ESA-L Series motherboards.
J20
47, 97
46, 96
44, 94
45, 95
3, 4
53, 54
34
J21 through
J24 b
3, 53
4, 54
6, 56
5, 55
47, 48
97, 98
14
Chapter 3 117
Table 3-3
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J1 Power Supply Connector
Pin
3
4
5
1
2
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
Signal
PS_ON
HPUP_PS
P5D
P5D
P5D
P15
P15
P15
P15
P5
P5
P5
P15
P5D
P5D
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
P5
P15
P28
P28
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
Pin
51
52
53
54
55
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
Signal
PS_OFF
PS_COM
P5D
P5D
P5D
P15
P15
P15
P15
P5
P5
P5
P15
P5D
P5D
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
P5
P15
P28
P28
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
118 Chapter 3
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J1 Power Supply Connector
Pin
33
34
35
30
31
32
48
49
50
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
FAN
FAN_RTN
LSRQ
LINE_TRIG
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
N5
N5
N15
N15
N15
N15
N15
N15
PS_ID0
A7J2 IF Assembly Connector
Pin
3
4
1
2
5
6
Signal
P5C
P15
P5
N5
N15
ACOM
Pin
21
22
23
24
25
26
Pin
83
84
85
80
81
82
98
99
100
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
N15
LADDR
SCK
LDATA
MOSI
LCNTRL
MISO
ACOM
N5
N5
N15
N15
N15
N15
N15
Signal
P5C
P15
P5
N5
N15
LADDR
Chapter 3 119
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J2 IF Assembly Connector
Pin
10
11
12
7
8
9
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
HPUP_AC
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
IF_VIDEO
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
DI_FREQ_CNT
A7J4 RF Connector
Pin
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
Signal
P28
P15
P5
P5C
N5
N15
ACOM
H_SWEEP
ACOM
HPUP_SYNC
ACOM
LSRQ
ACOM
Pin
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
29
30
31
32
33
Pin
30
31
32
27
28
29
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
Signal
SCK
LDATA
MOSI
LCNTRL
MISO
ACOM
ACOM
AC_IF
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
DN_FREQ_CNT
Signal
P28
P15
P5
P5C
N5
N15
LADDR
SCK
LDATA
MOSI
LCNTRL
MISO
ACOM
120 Chapter 3
Table 3-5
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J4 RF Connector
Pin
17
18
19
14
15
16
20
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
10MHZ_TG
ACOM
ACOM
Pin
37
38
39
34
35
36
40
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
ANA_TST
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
10MHZ_AC
Chapter 3 121
Table 3-6
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J6 Processor Digital Connector
Pin
3
4
5
1
2
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
Signal
MB_ID0
MB_ID2
DCOM
LI_IO3
DCOM
LI_IO0
DCOM
HWR_END_IO
DCOM
LCS_IO
DCOM
WLR_IO
DCOM
LAS_IO
DCOM
LEN_DTACK_IO
DCOM
X1
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
IO_A(14)
DCOM
IO_A(11)
DCOM
IO_A(8)
DCOM
IO_A(5)
DCOM
Pin
51
52
53
54
55
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
Signal
MB_ID1
MB_ID3
LI_IO4
LI_IO2
LI_IO1
LI_IO_SLOW
LCS_HIGH_IO
LWAIT_IO
LDTACK
LOE_IO
LRESET_IO
LDS_IO
LLW_IO
LUW_IO
SIZ0_IO
SIZ1_IO
X2
DCOM
DCOM
IO_A(16)
IO_A(15)
IO_A(13)
IO_A(12)
IO_A(10)
IO_A(9)
IO_A(7)
IO_A(6)
IO_A(4)
IO_A(3)
122 Chapter 3
Table 3-6
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J6 Processor Digital Connector
Pin
33
34
35
30
31
32
48
49
50
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
Signal
IO_A(2)
DCOM
IO_A(0)
DCOM
IO_D(14)
DCOM
IO_D(11)
DCOM
IO_D(8)
DCOM
IO_D(5)
DCOM
IO_D(2)
DCOM
P5D
P5D
P5D
P5D
P5D
HPUP_PS
PS_ON
Pin
83
84
85
80
81
82
98
99
100
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
Signal
IO_A(1)
DCOM
IO_D(15)
IO_D(13)
IO_D(12)
IO_D(10)
P5D
P5D
P5D
P5D
P5D
PS_COM
PS_OFF
IO_D(9)
IO_D(7)
IO_D(6)
IO_D(4)
IO_D(3)
IO_D(1)
IO_D(0)
DCOM
Chapter 3 123
Table 3-7
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J7 Processor Analog Connector
Pin
3
4
5
1
2
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
Signal
ACOM
DN_FREQ_CNT
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
AUDIO
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ANA_TST
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
AUDIO_OUT
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG1
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
IF_VIDEO
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
Pin
51
52
53
54
55
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
Signal
ACOM
DI_FREQ_CNT
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
10MHZ_AC
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG2
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
AUX_VIDEO
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
GATE_AC
H_SWEEP
124 Chapter 3
Table 3-7
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J7 Processor Analog Connector
Pin
33
34
35
30
31
32
48
49
50
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
Signal
AC_TRIG
ACOM
ADC_SYNC
ACOM
HPUP_SYNC
ACOM
HPUP_AC
ACOM
LINE_TRIG
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
N15
N15
N5
P5
P15
P15
P28
ACOM
Pin
83
84
85
80
81
82
98
99
100
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
Signal
HSWP_CNTRL
HSWP_AC
LSRQ
NC
MISO
LCNTRL
N15
N5
P5
P15
P15
P28
ACOM
MOSI
LDATA
SCK
LADDR
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
N15
Chapter 3 125
Table 3-8
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J10 through A7J16 Analog Card/ J10 Tracking Generator Connector
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
3
4
5
Pin
1
2
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
AUDIO
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG7
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG5
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG3
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG1
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
IF_VIDEO
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
GATE_AC
ACOM
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
53
54
55
Pin
51
52
Signal
ACOM
10MHz_AC/10MHz_T
G
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
ANA_TST
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG6
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG4
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
CRD_ANLG2
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
AUX_VIDEO
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
AC_IF
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
126 Chapter 3
Table 3-8
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J10 through A7J16 Analog Card/ J10 Tracking Generator Connector
Signal
AC_TRIG
ACOM
ADC_SYNC
ACOM
HPUP_AC
AC_ID0
P5
P15
P15
P28
ACOM
DCOM
P5D
AC_ID1
AC_ID2
AC_ID3
AC_ID4
ACOM
N15
N5
P5
Pin
33
34
35
30
31
32
48
49
50
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
Signal
HSWP_CNTRL
HSWP_AC/H_SWEEP
LSRQ
HPUP_SYNC
MISO
LCNTRL
P5
P15
P15
P28
ACOM
DCOM
P5D
MOSI
LDATA
SCK
LADDR
ACOM
N15
N5
P5
Pin
83
84
85
80
81
82
98
99
100
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
Chapter 3 127
Table 3-9
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J20 Speaker Board Connector
Pin
3
4
5
1
2
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
Signal
DCOM
IO_ID1
P5D
P5D
DCOM
IO_D(14)
DCOM
IO_A(0)
DCOM
IO_A(2)
DCOM
IO_A(5)
DCOM
IO_D(2)
DCOM
IO_D(5)
DCOM
IO_D(8)
DCOM
IO_D(11)
DCOM
IO_A(8)
DCOM
IO_A(11)
DCOM
IO_A(14)
DCOM
X1
DCOM
Pin
51
52
53
54
55
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
Signal
IO_ID0
IO_ID2
P5D
P5D
IO_D(0)
IO_D(13)
IO_D(15)
DCOM
IO_A(1)
IO_A(3)
IO_A(4)
IO_A(6)
IO_A(7)
IO_D(1)
IO_D(3)
IO_D(4)
IO_D(6)
IO_D(7)
IO_D(9)
IO_D(10)
IO_D(12)
IO_A(9)
IO_A(10)
IO_A(12)
IO_A(13)
IO_A(15)
IO_A(16)
DCOM
X2
128 Chapter 3
Table 3-9
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J20 Speaker Board Connector
Pin
33
34
35
30
31
32
48
49
50
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
Signal
LEN_DTACK_IO
DCOM
LAS_IO
DCOM
WLR_IO
DCOM
LCS_IO
DCOM
HWR_END_IO
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
ACOM
ACOM
P15
P5
N5
N15
ACOM
ACOM
ACOM
Pin
83
84
85
80
81
82
98
99
100
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
Signal
SIZ1_IO
SIZ0_IO
LUW_IO
LLW_IO
LDS_IO
LRESET_IO
LOE_IO
LDTACK_IO
LWAIT_IO
LCS_HIGH_IO
LI_IO_SLOW
LI_IO0
ACOM
ACOM
P15
P5
N5
N15
ACOM
AUDIO_OUT
ACOM
Chapter 3 129
Table 3-10
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J21 and A7J24 I/O Assembly Connector
Pin
3
4
5
1
2
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
N15
N5
P5
P15
ACOM
ACOM
DCOM
HWR_END_IO
DCOM
LCS_IO
DCOM
WLR_IO
DCOM
LAS_IO
DCOM
LEN_DTACK_IO
DCOM
X1
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
IO_A(14)
DCOM
IO_A(11)
DCOM
IO_A(8)
DCOM
Pin
51
52
53
54
55
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
56
57
58
59
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
Signal
ACOM
ACOM
N15
N5
P5
P15
ACOM
ACOM
LI_IO1/2/3/4
LI_IO_SLOW
LCS_HIGH_IO
LWAIT_IO
LDTACK_IO
LOE_IO
LRESET_IO
LDS_IO
LLW_IO
LUW_IO
SIZ0_IO
SIZ1_IO
X2
DCOM
DCOM
IO_A(16)
IO_A(15)
IO_A(13)
IO_A(12)
IO_A(10)
IO_A(9)
130 Chapter 3
Table 3-10
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
A7J21 and A7J24 I/O Assembly Connector
Pin
33
34
35
30
31
32
48
49
50
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
36
37
38
39
Signal
IO_A(5)
DCOM
IO_A(2)
DCOM
IO_A(0)
DCOM
IO_D(2)
DCOM
DCOM
P5D
P5D
IO_ID1
DCOM
IO_D(14)
DCOM
IO_D(11)
DCOM
IO_D(8)
DCOM
IO_D(5)
DCOM
Pin
83
84
85
80
81
82
98
99
100
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
93
86
87
88
89
Signal
IO_A(7)
IO_A(6)
IO_A(4)
IO_A(3)
IO_A(1)
DCOM
IO_D(3)
IO_D(1)
IO_D(0)
P5D
P5D
IO_ID2
IO_ID0
IO_D(15)
IO_D(13)
IO_D(12)
IO_D(10)
IO_D(9)
IO_D(7)
IO_D(6)
IO_D(4)
Chapter 3 131
Block Diagrams
Motherboard Mnemonics and Connectors
Graphic Symbols Used On Block Diagrams
1
Bus Line Band Pass Filter
Op Amplifier
Indicates a plug-in connection (F) to (M)
High Pass Filter
Summer
Connection symbol indicating plug (movable)
F
¦ Phase
Frequency Detector
Connection symbol indicating jack (movable)
Mixer
Heavy line indicates path and direction of main signal
Oscillator or
Generator
Color code for cable Capacitor
Low Pass Filter
Band Reject Filter
Common
Return
TP?
Numbered
Test Point.
Measurement aid provided.
Resistor
Variable Gain
Amplifier
Variable Resistor
?
Lettered
Test Point. No
Measurement aid provided.
Amplifier Buffer
Switch Open
Slide, Toggle, or
Rocker, Switch
Inverter Buffer
Diode
Grounded
Coaxial Sheilding
Limiter
ADC
Analog Digital
Convertor
Directional
Coupler
Variable
Integrator
DAC
Digital Analog
Convertor formt123
132 Chapter 3
ESA-E SERIES BLOCK DIAGRAM
CONTROL FUNCTIONS POWER SUPPLY
J1
A6 FLOPPY/SPEAKER ASSEMBLY
SPEAKER
EARPHONE FLOPPY
DISC
DRIVE
AUDIO OUT
J4
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
J2 J20
J2 A7 MOTHERBOARD sl7110b
A3 IF ASSEMBLY
21.4 MHz
FILTER
21.4 MHz
FILTER
21.4 MHz
FILTER
21.4 MHz
FILTER
J2
21.4 MHz
W2
CAL ATTENUATOR
0-49 dB
7 dB STEP
POLE1 POLE2 POLE3 POLE4
85 dB LOG DETECTOR
LINEAR
STEP
GAIN
LINEAR DETECTOR
DOWN CONVERTER
VIDEO
CAL
IF_VIDEO
2
A1A2
KEYBOARD
7
4
1
0
8
.
5
2
9
6
3
-
A1A3
DISPLAY
A1A1 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
KEYBOARD
EXT KEYBOARD
W3
PROBE POWER
+15 V
DISPLAY
-12.6 V
BACKLIGHT
POWER &
DIMMER
CONTROL
P3
A1A4
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
A4 PROCESSOR
ASSEMBLY
J1
W1
J6
J1P16
J2 P16
A7A5 FAST ADC/
IF, SWP & VIDEO OUT
AUX_VIDEO
CRD_ANLG1
CDR_ANLG2
MUX
ADC_CLK
ADC
40 MHz
CLOCK
CLK 40M
FADC
CONTROL
HSWP_AC
10 MHz REF
AUX_IF
AUX_VIDEO_RP
HSWEEP_RP
HSWEEP_CONTROL_RP
SWEEP_RAMP
IF_VIDEO
J2-24
J2 J1
J14-24
ANALOG BUS
J14
SLOT 4
J24
J15 SLOT 5
I/O BUS
J3
AUX IF OUT
J4
AUX VIDEO OUT
A7A6 FM DEMOD or
A7A10 BLUETOOTH DEMOD
AC_IF
FM
DEMODULATION
MIXER
3 MHz
FM
DISCRIMINATOR
J5
HI SWEEP OUT
J6
J7
HI SWEEP IN
SWEEP OUT
J1-76
FM GAIN
& OFFSET
FM_DEMOD SELECT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
N.C.
DEMOD_AUDIO
AUDIO
J1
J1-4
J13 SLOT 3 J23 J12
SLOT 2 J22
A7A2 HP-IB/
PARALLEL
OR
A7A3 RS232/
PARALLEL
HP-IB
PARALLEL
OR
RS-232
PARALLEL
J1
J11 SLOT 1
REAR_PANEL
REAR_PANEL
A7A1 IF, SWP &
VIDEO OUT
AUX IF OUT
J2
AUX IF OUT
J3
AUX VIDEO OUT
AUX VIDEO
OUT
J4
HI SWEEP OUT
HI SWEEP
OUT
J5
HI SWEEP IN
HI SWEEP IN
J6
SWEEP OUT
SWEEP OUT
J1
J21 J16 SLOT 6
ANALOG BUS ANALOG BUS
J4
W4 TO A8J4 OR
A8A1A1P6 AND
A8A1A2J1
I/O BUS
J7P24 IF_VIDEO
J2P24
MUX
VIDEO
FILTER
POSITIVE PEAK
DETECTOR
NEGATIVE PEAK
DETECTOR
MUX 12 BIT
ANALOG TO
DIGITAL
CONVERTER
MICROPROCESSOR
J20
A4A1 FLASH
SIMM
J19
A4A2 DRAM
SIMM
J6
J3
CONTROL
FUNCTIONS
J7
J2
POWER
SUPPLY
FP KEYBOARD
PROBE POWER
AT KEYBOARD
DISPLAY DRIVER
RAM BATTERY
GATE &
HSWP
J9
J8
GATE/HI
SWP OUT
GATE TRIG/
EXT TRIG IN
VGA OUTPUT J7
RS232
TEST
J1
VGA OUTPUT
REAR PANEL
J1
A5 POWER SUPPLY
ASSEMBLY
REGULATORS
DC/DC CONVERTER
FORWARD
CONVERTER
LINE
RECTIFIER
+AC IN
F2
-AC IN
AC GND
F1
BATTERY + J6P1
BATTERY GND J6P2
P4
REAR PANEL
BATTERY
J6
FAN B1
LINE IN
DC INPUT
ESA-E Series Block Diagram
E4402B/E4403B RF SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM
INPUT
50 W
A8J1
TYPE N (f)
9 kHz - 3.0 GHz
+30 dBm MAX
100V dc MAX
W7
AMPTD
REF OUT
A8J2
(P/O A8A1W4)
BNC (f)
50 MHz, -20 dBm
A8A3 DC
BLOCK
J1 J2
W14
A8A5 INPUT
ATTENUATOR
0-75 dB,
5 dB STEP
J1
A8A1W4 AMPTD REF OUT
J2
A8FL1
3.1 GHz
LPF
W15
J1 J2
W8
W4
W1
OPTION UKB ONLY
A8J1
100 Hz - 3.0 GHz
+30 dBm MAX
100V dc MAX
W6
A8A5 INPUT
ATTENUATOR
0 - 75 dB
5 dB STEP
J1 J2
10
W2
W15
INPUT
50 W
J3
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF ASSEMBLY
A8A1A2 FRONT END/LO BOARD
J2
RF INPUT
SMA (f)
BYPASS
PREAMP
20dB
J4
CAL OUT
SMB (f) 50 MHz
J7
CAL SIG IN
MMCX
50 MHz - 15 dB
5dB
3dB
J8
REF IN
MMCX
600 MHz
30 dB
SWITCH
DRIVERS
128/
129
LEVEL
TRANSLATOR
NC
F
¦
PRETUNE
TUNE
OFFSET
DELAY
COMP
FRAC-N
DIVIDE
FIRST MIXER
RF
LO
IF
FM COIL DRIVER
MODULUS CONTROL
3.9214 GHz
700 MHz BW
GAIN
ADJ
MAIN COIL
DRIVER
YTO
MODULATOR
6 dB
2/4
3 dB
FIRST IF AMP
+10.5 dB
5.5 GHz
-3.4 dB
4
LO
PWR
3 dB
DIGITAL
CONTROL
10 dB
40
J3
1ST IF OUT
SMA (f) 3.9214 GHz
J1
POWER SUPPLY
FILTERING
64
LO ADJ
DETECTOR
J5
AUX LO OUT
SMA (f) ~0 dBm
3 dB
J6
IF CAL OUT
SMB (f) 21.4 MHz
A8A1W3
A8A2 SECOND CONVERTER
W9
J1
3.9214 GHz
RF
LO
IF
3.6 GHz
800 MHz
J2
200 MHz
IF OUT
321.4 MHz
(SMB)
W11
10 x 6
J6
NC
J5
TEST J4
NC
J3
4.2 GHz
W13
W10
P/O W4 TO A7J4
TG LO OUT TO A2A1J3
(OPT 1DN ONLY) sl7101b
10 MHz
INPUT
W11
A8A1A1 REFERENCE/THIRD CONVERTER
J2
IF INPUT SMB (f)
321.4 MHz
TIME
BASE
10 MHz INPUT
BNC (f)
10 MHz
VCXO
10 MHz
OCXO
(OPT AY5)
P/O W4
TO A7J4
P6
POWER/CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY
FILTERING
DIGITAL
CONTROL
2
10 MHz TG
10 MHz AC
F
¦
6.2 dB
400 MHz
18.6 dB
321.4 MHz
100 MHz
VCXO
X 3
10
300 MHz
W3
ACTIVE MIXER
RF
LO
IF
21.4 MHz
J6
IF CAL INPUT SMB (m) 21.4 MHz
2
GAIN
ADJ
X 2
50 MHz
AGC
ATTEN DRIVERS
2ND CONV
BIAS/CONTROL
600 MHz
20
-20 dB
20 dB
W2
P5
IF OUT SMB (m) 21.4 MHz
W2 21.4 MHz
IF TO
A3J2
W10
P1
2ND LO DRIVE SMB (m) 600 MHz
P3
TG DRIVESMB (m) 600 MHz
W12
W2
J5
REF OUT MMCX 600 MHz A8A1W2
J1
50 MHz CAL MMCX
A8A1W1
10 MHz OUTPUT BNC (f)
W1
J4
W36 (OPTION 120)
W12 600 MHz
TG DRIVE
TO A2A2J8
(OPTION 1DN
ONLY)
10 MHz
OUTPUT
P7
ATTEN/2ND CONV DRIVE
W5 20
10
10
J3
W37
(Option 120)
A7A9 ACPR DYNAMIC
RANGE EXTENSION
ASSEMBLY
(OPTION 120)
J5
J1
A7J11,
A7J12,
A7J13,
A7J14,
A7J15 or
A7J16
W11
E4402B/E4403B RF SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM
sl7109b
AMPTD REF
OUTPUT
A8J2
(P/O A8A1W4)
BNC (f)
50 MHz -20 dBm
W6
INPUT 50 Z
A8J1
TYPE N (f)
APC 3.5 (m) (OPT BAB)
+30 dBm max
J1
INPUT 50 Z
A8J1
TYPE N (f)
+30 dBm max
100V dc max
W6
J1
W4
J2
J3
P/O W5 FROM A8A1A1J2
W17
J2
J3
P/O W5 FROM A8A1A1J2
W20
A8A4 LO AMP/IF SWITCH (LOIS)
J1
MODULATOR
W23
INT DET
EXT DET
W20
NC
J5 INT IF
INPUT
J6 EXT IF
INPUT
POWER SUPPLY
FILTER AND
CONTROL
J8
ALC
INT/EXT
MIXER BIAS
INT DET
EXT DET
6.5 dB
BAND START FREQ STOP FREQ N +/- IF LO RANGE
0 -100 MHz 3.05 GHz 1 -39214 GHz 3.8214/
7.0214 GHz
1 2.85 GHz 6.78 GHz 1 -321.4 MHz 3.1714/
7.1014 GHz
2
3.2607/
6.8107 GHz
3
12.8 GHz 19.2 GHz 4 -321.4 MHz
3.28025/
4.88035 GHz
4 18.7 GHz 27.0 GHz
4
-321.4 MHz
4.79465/
6.83035 GHz
A8A1W4 AMPTD REF OUT
J2
W22
DELAY
COMPENSATION
ANA_TEST
A7J16,
A7J15,
OR
A7J14
100/
J1
10 MHz
POWER SUPPLY
FILTERING AND
DIGITAL CONTROL
VARIABLE RATE
GEN & SWEEP
CLOCK
START
REG AND
COUNTER
OVER-TUNE
REGISTER
DAC
12 bit
DAC
16 bit
MIX
DAC
J4
NC
J7
J3
W13
W19 TO
A2A1J 3
W21
ALC
DAC
14
16
SWITCH
CONTROL
J2
30
30
W16
W17
J3
A8A6 YIG-TUNED FILTER/MIXER
(RYTHM)
J2
ODD
J1
RF
LO
IF
EVEN
YTF COIL DRIVER
PIN SWITCH DRIVER
J5 J4
10
W18
A8FL1
3.1 GHz
LPF
J2 J1
W20
16
W22
W19
A8A3 DC
BLOCK
J2 J1
W8
W35
(OPT UKB)
W4
A8A1W1
W1
W2
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF ASSEMBLY
A8A1A2 FRONT END/LO BOARD
J2
RF INPUT
SMA (f)
BYPASS
PREAMP
20dB
J4
CAL OUT
SMB (f) 50 MHz
J7
CAL SIG IN
MMCX
50 MHz - 15 dB
5dB
30 dB
SWITCH
DRIVERS
NC
J8
REF IN
MMCX
600 MHz
3dB
128/
129
LEVEL
TRANSLATOR F
¦
PRETUNE
TUNE
OFFSET
DELAY
COMP
FRAC-N
DIVIDE
FIRST MIXER
RF
LO
IF
MODULUS CONTROL
FM COIL DRIVER
MAIN COIL
DRIVER
2/4
3.9214 GHz
700 MHz BW
GAIN
ADJ
YTO
MODULATOR
3 dB
FIRST IF AMP
6 dB
+10.5 dB
5.5 GHz
-3.4 dB
4
DIGITAL
CONTROL
LO
PWR
3 dB 10 dB
POWER SUPPLY
FILTERING
64
1ST IF OUT
SMA (f) 3.9214 GHz
J3
40 J1
LO ADJ
DETECTOR
J5
AUX LO OUT
SMA (f) ~0 dBm
3 dB
J6
IF CAL OUT
MMCX 21.4 MHz
A8A1W3
A8A2 SECOND CONVERTER
W9
J1
3.9214 GHz
RF
LO
IF
W4
3.6 GHz
800 MHz
J2
200 MHz
IF OUT
321.4 MHz
(SMB)
P/O W4
TO A7J4
W23
X6
J6
NC
J5
TEST J4 J3
4.2 GHz
W21
W11
W11
10 MHz
INPUT
10 MHz INPUT
BNC (f)
A8A1A1 REFERENCE/THIRD CONVERTER
P2
IF INPUT SMB (f)
321.4 MHz
TIME
BASE
10 MHz
VCXO
10 MHz
OCXO
(OPT AY5)
10 MHz TG
P/O W4
TO A7J4
P6
POWER/CONTROL
2
10 MHz AC
POWER SUPPLY
FILTERING
DIGITAL
CONTROL
F
¦
6.2 dB
400 MHz
18.6 dB
321.4 MHz
ACTIVE MIXER
RF
LO
IF
300 MHz
100 MHz
VCXO
X 3
10
GAIN
ADJ
X 2
50 MHz
AGC
ATTEN DRIVERS
2ND CONV
BIAS/CONTROL
21.4 MHz
600 MHz
20
W3
IF CAL INPUT MMCX 21.4 MHz
J6
IF OUT SMB (m) 21.4 MHz
P5
-20 dB
20 dB
2ND LO DRIVE SMB (m) 600 MHz
P1
TG DRIVESMB (m) 600 MHz
P3
J5
REF OUT MMCX 600 MHz
J1
50 MHz CAL MMCX
A8A1W2
A8A1W1
W10
W1
ATTEN/2ND CONV DRIVE
J2
W2
W12
W2
W5
J4
10 MHz OUTPUT BNC (f)
20
10
10
W2 21.4 MHz
IF TO
A3J2
W36 (OPTION 120)
W12 600 MHz
TG DRIVE
TO A2A2J5
(OPTION 1DN
ONLY)
10 MHz
OUTPUT
P/O W5 TO A8A5J3
W11
W23
W21
W37
(OPTION 120)
A7A9 ACPR DYNAMIC
RANGE EXTENSION
ASSEMBLY
(OPTION 120)
J3
J5
J1
A7J11,
A7J12,
A7J13,
A7J14,
A7J15 or
A7J16
Figure 3-2
Block Diagrams
Tracking Generator Block Diagrams
Tracking Generator Block Diagrams
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Block Diagram, E4401B and E4411B
Chapter 3 139
Figure 3-3
Block Diagrams
Tracking Generator Block Diagrams
A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Block Diagram, E4402B, E4403B, E4404B,
E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B
140 Chapter 3
Figure 3-4
Block Diagrams
Digital Demod DSP/Fast ADC Block Diagram
Digital Demod DSP/Fast ADC Block Diagram
A7A7 DSP Block Diagram, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B
Chapter 3 141
Figure 3-5
Block Diagrams
Digital Demod RF Block Diagram
Digital Demod RF Block Diagram
A7A8 DD RF Block Diagram, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B
142 Chapter 3
4
Options and Accessories
This chapter lists the options and accessories that can be ordered along with your analyzer. The Option Table on the following page shows which options are available for your particular product.
143
Options and Accessories
Table 4-1
Option
Option Table
225
226
227
228
230
042
044
049
Gray Backpack carrying case
060
106
120
219
Yellow Backpack carrying case
Color Display
1
Low Emission
2,3
Bluetooth FM Demodulation
4
ACPR Dynamic Range Extension
Noise Figure Measurement Personality and
Hardware
Distance to Fault Measurement Personality
Phase Noise Measurement Personality
Cable TV Measurement Personality
Bluetooth Measurement Personality
Benchlink Web Remote Control Software
5
8566 Series Programming Code Compatibility 266
303
304
0B0
Bluetooth General Purpose Bundle
Bluetooth Premium Bundle
Delete Manual Set
0B1 Add Manual Set
0BV Service Documentation, Component Level
0BW Service Documentation, Assembly Level
1AX
RS-232 and Parallel Interface
6
1CP
1D5
1D6
Rack Mount with Handles
High Stability Frequency Reference
Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis
1D7 50 to 75 Ohm Matching Pad
1DN 50 Ohm Tracking Generator
1DP
75 Ohm input
7
1DR Narrow Resolution Bandwidths
144 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
Table 4-1
Option
Option Table (Continued)
1DQ
75 Ohm Tracking Generator
8
1DS RF Preamplifier
A4H
GPIB and Parallel Interface
9
A4J IF, Video and Sweep Ports
A5D DC Power Cable
AXT Transit Case
AYT Gray Soft Carrying/Operating Case
AYU Yellow Carrying/Operating Case
AYX Fast Time Domain Sweeps
AYZ External Mixing
B70
B72
Benchlink Spectrum Analyzer
Enhanced Memory Upgrade
B74
B75
RF and Digital Communications Hardware
B7B
TV Trigger and Picture on Screen
10
B7D Digital Signal Processing and
Fast ADC
B7E RF Communications Hardware
B7K Distance to Fault Accessory Kit
BAA
FM Demodulation
11
BAB APC 3.5 Input Connector
BAC cdmaOne Measurement Personality
BAH GSM Measurement Personality
UE2 Firmware Upgrade Kit
UKB
UK6
Low Frequency Extension
12
UK9 Front Panel Cover
W30 3 Year Service Support
Chapter 4
145
Options and Accessories
Table 4-1
Option
Option Table (Continued)
W32 3 Year Calibration Contract
W50 5 Year Service Support
W52 5 Year Calibration Contract
1. Option 049 is standard on newer ESA-L Series analyzers.
2. This option is incompatible with Option B7B.
3. This option operates only with ac input power. Battery or dc power will not enable this option on the analyzer.
4. Option 106 is incompatible with Option BAA.
5. This option requires Option A4H or 1AX.
6. Option 1AX is incompatible with Option A4H.
7. This option is only available at time of purchase.
8. This option has a 75 Ohm output impedance, and is only available with Option 1DP.
9. Option A4H is incompatible with Option 1AX.
10.Option B7B requires Option BAA.
11.Option BAA is incompatible with Option 106
12.Option UKB requires Option 1DR.
146 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
Options
Options
Options can be ordered by option number when you order your analyzer. Some of the options are also available as kits that can be ordered and installed after you
have received your spectrum analyzer. Refer to Table 4-1 on page 144 to determine
which options are available for your particular product.
Chapter 4 147
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
How to Order Options
At the time of instrument purchase, options can be ordered using your product number and the number of the option you are ordering. For example, if you are ordering Option 1D6 for an Agilent E4401B, you would order E4401B 1D6.
If you are ordering an option after the purchase of your analyzer, you will need to add a U (for upgrade) to the product number and then specify which option you are ordering.
The options are listed in alphabetical order by name below for your review. If you
know the option you wish to order, refer to Table 4-1 on page 144
which is in ascending order by option number.
12 Vdc Power Cable (Option A5D)
Option A5D provides a 12 Vdc power cable that allows your analyzer to be powered from 12 V automotive or truck batteries.
3 Year Calibration Contract (Option W32)
Option W32 provides your analyzer with a 3 year instrument calibration contract.
3 Year Service Support (Option W30)
Option W30 provides your analyzer with a total of 3 years of service support. This adds a 2 year service contract to the analyzer’s base 1 year warranty.
5 Year Calibration Contract (Option W52)
Option W52 provides your analyzer with a 5 year instrument calibration contract.
5 Year Service Support (Option W50)
Option W50 provides your analyzer with a total of 5 years of service support. This adds a 4 year service contract to the analyzer’s base 1 year warranty.
50
to 75 Matching Pad (Option 1D7)
This option provides a 50
to 75 matching pad with dc block to be used on the analyzer input. The pad has a frequency range of 9 MHz to 2 GHz. It adapts your standard 50
analyzer to be compatible with a 75 system under test. Connector types are 50
Type-N (m) to 75 BNC (f).
50 Ohm
Tracking Generator (Option 1DN)
Option 1DN provides a 9 kHz to 1.5 GHz built-in tracking generator for the
Agilent E4401B and the Agilent E4411B. Option 1DN provides a 9 kHz to 3 GHz
148 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options built-in tracking generator for the Agilent E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B,
E4407B and E4408B. This source creates a source-receiver combination that allows insertion-loss, frequency response, and return-loss measurements. The tracking generator has a wide distortion-free dynamic range, plus good sensitivity and selectivity.
75 Ohm Input Impedance (Option 1DP)
This option provides a 75
input impedance instead of the standard 50 impedance. Analyzers with this option use cables, circuit boards, and front panels that are different from the standard units. Option 1DP is only available on the
Agilent E4401B and E4411B.
Option 1DP is not available after the purchase of your analyzer.
75 Ohm
Tracking Generator (Option 1DQ)
Option 1DQ provides a 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz built-in tracking generator for the
Agilent E4401B and the Agilent E4411B. Option 1DQ provides a 1 MHz to 3 GHz built-in tracking generator for the Agilent E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B. This source creates a source-receiver combination that allows insertion-loss, frequency response, and return-loss measurements. The tracking generator has a wide distortion-free dynamic range, plus good sensitivity and selectivity.
Option 1DQ has a 75
output impedance, and is only available with Option 1DP.
8566 Series Programming Code Compatibility
(Option 266)
Option 266 allows use of a limited set of 8566 Series programming commands to control the ESA Series analyzers. When this option is enabled, SCPI commands are disabled if the remote language selected is not SCPI.
ACPR Dynamic Range Extension (Option 120)
Option 120 provides extended dynamic range for ACPR measurements by improving phase noise at offsets 800 kHz to 8 MHz.
Additional Manual Set (Option 0B1)
Option 0B1 provides an additional copy of the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers
User’s Guide, Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers Calibration Guide, Agilent ESA
Spectrum Analyzers Specifications Guide - E Series or Agilent ESA Spectrum
Analyzers Specifications Guide - L Series, and the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers
Reference Guide.
APC 3.5 Input Connector (Option BAB)
The type-N female connector is replaced with an APC 3.5 mm male connector. An
Chapter 4 149
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f), and BNC (f) to SMA (m) adapters are included for alignment purposes.
Backpack Operating and Carrying Cases
(Option 042/044)
Options 042 and 044 are protective soft operating and backpack carrying cases.
Option 042 is made of gray rip-stop nylon and Option 044 is made of yellow rip-stop nylon. An outside pocket holds manuals or other accessories. Reinforced adjustable padded shoulder straps provides ergonomic distribution between your shoulder. The front and rear panel soft covers adjust to be compatible with the front panel protective hard cover (Option UK9) and snap on battery pack (Agilent
E1779BA). Side ventilation allows for operation without removal, but the maximum operating temperature is reduced to 45
C.
Benchlink Spectrum Analyzer (Option B70)
Option B70 provides the Benchlink Spectrum Analyzer software which can be used to capture screen images and trace data using a personal computer (PC). The captured information can then be used in other PC applications, including word processing and spread sheets.
Benchlink Web Remote Control Software
(Option 230)
Option 230 provides software which can be used to control the analyzer remotely over the web. When the analyzer is connected via GP-IB to one personal computer
(PC), access to the analyzer is available through any internet connection by specifying the IP address of the physically connected PC. The following analyzer functions are available through remote web access:
• front panel control
• capture screen images
• capture trace data
• remote programming commands (SCPI)
Bluetooth FM Demodulation (Option 106)
Option 106 is required to perform FM demodulation on signals measured with the
Bluetooth Measurement Personality (Option 228).
Option 106 allows you to demodulate, display and measure deviation on Bluetooth
FM modulated signals. You can listen to audio signals on a built-in speaker or with an earphone.
Option 106 provides the following additional port:
EXT VIDEO OUT - provides a detected video output (before the analog-to-digital conversion) proportional to the vertical deflection of the trace (75
).
150 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
Bluetooth General Purpose Bundle (Option 303)
Option 303 provides
• Bluetooth FM Demodulation (Option 106)
• Bluetooth Measurement Personality (Option 228)
• Fast Digitized Time Domain Sweeps (Option AYX)
• Enhanced Memory Upgrade (Option B72)
Bluetooth Measurement Personality (Option 228)
Option 228 provides transmitter and receiver measurements required to test
Bluetooth devices. The set of Bluetooth measurements includes:
• Modulation Overview
• Output Power
• Carrier Frequency Drift
• Monitor Band/Channel
• Initial Carrier Frequency Tolerance
• Modulation Characteristics
Option 228 includes: Bluetooth user’s guide, Bluetooth quick reference card,
Bluetooth measurement guide, and Bluetooth programming commands manual.
Bluetooth FM Demodulation (Option 106) is required for full functionality of this personality.
Bluetooth Premium Bundle (Option 304)
Option 304 provides the following:
• Bluetooth demodulator board (Option 106)
• Bluetooth measurement personality (Option 228)
• high stability frequency reference (Option 1D5)
• digital signal processing and fast ADC (Option B7D)
• RF communications hardware (Option B7E)
• enhanced memory upgrade (Option B72)
• RF preamplifier (Option 1DS)
Cable TV Measurement Personality (Option 227)
Option 227 provides measurement capabilities necessary for installation and service of cable TV.
cdmaOne Measurement Personality (Option BAC)
Option BAC provides transmitter and receiver measurements that comply with various international digital communications standards, including
TIA/EIA/IS-95-A, TIA/EIA-95-B, TIA/EIA/IS-97-A, TIA/EIA-97-B,
TIA/EIA/IS-98-A, TIA/EIA-98-B, J-STD-008, J-STD-018, J-STD-019, ARIB
STD-T53, CKOR, and PKOR. The set of cdmaOne measurements includes:
Chapter 4 151
NOTE
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
• channel power
• receiver channel power
• modulation accuracy (RHO)
• code domain power
• receiver spurious
• out-of-band spurious
• harmonics
• occupied bandwidth
• monitor channel/band
• close-in spur
Option BAC includes a cdmaOne user’s guide, cdmaOne quick reference card, cdmaOne measurement guide and cdmaOne programming commands manual.
For optimum performance of this personality, installation of “RF and Digital
Communications Hardware (Option B74)”
is recommended.
Color Display (Option 049)
Option 049 provides a color display on ESA-L Series analyzers (E4403B, E4408B, and E4411B). Option 049 is standard on all newer ESA-L Series analyzers and may be retrofitted into older analyzers.
Commercial Calibration with Test Data
(Option UK6)
Option UK6 provides the factory calibration test data and the standard commercial calibration certificate on the initial analyzer shipment.
Option UK6 is only available at time of purchase.
Component Level Service Documentation (Option 0BV)
Option 0BV provides a copy of the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers
Component-Level Information. The component-level information includes parts lists, component-location diagrams, and schematic diagrams for selected repairable assemblies.
Delete Manual Set (Option 0B0)
Option 0B0 deletes copies of the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers User’s Guide,
Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers Calibration Guide, Agilent ESA Spectrum
Analyzers Specifications Guide - E Series or Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers
Specifications Guide - L Series, and the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers
Reference Guide.
152 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
Digital Signal Processing and Fast ADC (Option B7D)
Option B7D provides digital signal processing and fast ADC. This option is required for many of the mobile communication measurements in the GSM and cdmaOne measurement personalities. Option B7D must be ordered with Option
B7E (RF communications hardware) and Option 1D5 (high stability frequency reference).
For A.07.00 firmware revisions and later, either this option or Option AYX (Fast
Digitized Time Domain Sweeps) is required to perform the PowerStat
Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (PowerStat CCDF) for all radio standards. It is also required to perform the ACP measurement when the NADC radio standard is selected.
Distance to Fault Accessory Kit (Option B7K)
Option B7K includes the 86205A (RF bridge), 11636A (power divider), 909A
(coax termination), 11512A (coax short), 8120-8687 (coax cable), and 9211-0050
(padded case).
Distance to Fault Measurement Personality (Option 225)
Option 225 performs a Fast Fourier Transform to calculate the distance to a cable fault. This option must be ordered with 50
Tracking Generator (Option 1DN).
This measurement includes on-screen instructional dialog to guide set up and calibration. Velocity factor and cable loss can be user-defined or selected from several different pre-defined cable types.
Enhanced Memory Upgrade (Option B72)
Option B72 provides 2 SIMMS which increases the analyzer’s RAM to 32 MBytes and its flash or data storage memory to 16 MBytes (10 MBytes of which are available to the user for data storage).
External Mixing (Option AYZ)
Option AYZ allows the use of Agilent 11970 Series, and Agilent 11974 external mixers with the Agilent E4407B analyzer to extend the frequency range to 110
GHz. Operation to 325 GHz is also possible with non-Agilent mixers.
Chapter 4 153
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
Fast Digitized Time Domain Sweeps (Option AYX)
Option AYX allows fast digitized sweep times as fast as 20
sec in spans of 0 Hz.
This option is required to perform the Complementary Cumulative Distribution
Function (CCDF) available in A.07.00 firmware revisions and later. Refer to the
Sweep key description in the user’s guide for information about possible sweep times. It also provides the following additional inputs and outputs:
Option AYX - provides the analyzer with additional inputs and outputs. They are as follows: SWP OUT, HI SWP OUT (TTL), HI SWP IN (TTL), AUX VIDEO
OUT, and AUX IF OUT.
SWP OUT - sweep ramp output, provides a voltage ramp proportional to the sweep of the analyzer (0 V to 10 V).
HI SWP OUT (TTL) - provides the HI SWP TTL signal as an output (TTL high during a sweep, TTL low during a retrace). It indicates when the analyzer is sweeping
HI SWP IN (TTL) - allows external sweep control. It can be grounded to stop and reset the sweep.
AUX VIDEO OUT - provides detected video output (before the analog-to-digital conversion) proportional to vertical deflection of the trace.
AUX IF OUT - provides a 50
, 21.4 MHz IF output that is the down-converted signal of the RF input of the analyzer.
For A.07.00 firmware revisions and later, either this option or Option B7D (Digital
Signal Processing and Fast ADC) is required to perform the PowerStat
Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function (PowerStat CCDF) for all radio standards. It is also required to perform the ACP measurement when the NADC radio standard is selected.
Firmware Upgrade Kit (Option UE2)
Option UE2 provides the most current ESA spectrum analyzer firmware on 3-1/2 inch floppy disks.
FM Demodulation (Option BAA)
Option BAA allows you to demodulate, display and measure deviation on FM modulated signals. You can listen to audio signals on a built-in speaker or with an earphone.
Option BAA provides the following additional port:
EXT VIDEO OUT - provides a detected video output (before the analog-to-digital conversion) proportional to the vertical deflection of the trace (75
).
154 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
Front Panel Protective Cover (Option UK9)
The cover assembly snaps onto the front of your analyzer to protect the front panel during travel and when the unit is not in use. The front panel protective cover includes a storage compartment to house small accessories or cables.
GPIB and Parallel Interface (Option A4H)
Option A4H allows you to control your analyzer from a computer that uses a general purpose interface bus (GPIB). Option A4H includes an GPIB connector, a parallel interface connector for printers, a CD-ROM containing IntuiLink Toolbar software
1
, and the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers Programmer’s Guide.
Option A4H allows the analyzer to copy its display to a printer.
GSM Measurement Personality (Option BAH)
Option BAH provides transmitter and receiver measurements that comply with various international digital communications standards, including ETS 300 607-1,
ETS 300 609-1, ETS 300 910, and J-STD-007. The set of GSM measurements includes, transmit power, power steps, power versus time, spurious emissions suite, intermodulation attenuation suite, phase and frequency error, cable fault location suite, slow frequency hopping cycle verification, monitor suite, and output RF spectrum suite. Option BAH includes a GSM user’s guide, GSM quick reference card, GSM measurement guide, and programming commands manual.
Hard Transit Case (Option AXT)
Option AXT provides a hard transit case. The hard transit case will survive commercial transportation. This rugged case has two wheels and an extendible handle for easy transport. The case can also accommodate two battery packs and ac adapters.
High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5)
Option 1D5 improves the frequency reference accuracy. The analyzer’s synthesizer is phase locked to an oven controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO), instead of the standard VCXO.
IF, Sweep and Video Ports (Option A4J)
Option A4J provides the analyzer with additional inputs and outputs. They are as follows: SWP OUT, HI SWP OUT (TTL), HI SWP IN (TTL), AUX VIDEO OUT, and AUX IF OUT.
SWP OUT - sweep ramp output, provides a voltage ramp proportional to the sweep
1. This program allows you to download spectrum analyzer display or data files to a personal computer using Microsoft
Word or Microsoft Excel. Benchlink installation instructions are included with the CD-ROM.
Chapter 4 155
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options of the analyzer (0 V to 10 V).
HI SWP OUT (TTL) - provides the HI SWP TTL signal as an output (TTL high during a sweep, TTL low during a retrace). It indicates when the analyzer is sweeping.
HI SWP IN (TTL) - allows external sweep control. It can be grounded to stop sweeping.
AUX VIDEO OUT - provides detected video output (before the analog-to-digital conversion) proportional to vertical deflection of the trace.
AUX IF OUT - provides a 50
, 21.4 MHz IF output that is the down-converted signal of the RF input of the analyzer.
Low Emission (Option 060)
Option 060 provides reduced radiated and conducted emissions to comply with
EN55011 Class B requirements. This option applies during ac operation only.
Option 060 is incompatible with TV Trigger (Option B7B).
Low Frequency Extension (Option UKB)
Option UKB extends the frequency range of the analyzer on the low end to 100 Hz
when DC coupling is selected. This option requires installation of “Narrow
Resolution Bandwidth (Option 1DR)” on ESA models E4402B, E4404B, E4405B,
and E4407B.
Narrow Resolution Bandwidth (Option 1DR)
This option provides additional narrow resolution bandwidths of 10 Hz, 30 Hz,
100 Hz, and 300 Hz and 200 Hz EMI. These bandwidths improve the analyzer sensitivity and allow you to resolve closely spaced signals.
Noise Figure Measurement Personality and Hardware
(Option 219)
This option provides noise figure and gain measurement capability on the ESA-E
Series spectrum analyzers. Support for Agilent Technologies SNS Series Noise
Sources, and for normal noise sources, such as the HP/Agilent 346-Series noise sources, is provided.
Operating and Carrying Cases (Option AYT/AYU)
Options AYT and AYU are protective soft operating and carrying cases. Option
AYT is made of gray rip-stop nylon and Option ATU is made of yellow rip-stop nylon. An outside pocket holds manuals or other accessories. A reinforced adjustable padded shoulder strap provides ergonomic distribution between your hand and shoulder. The front and rear panel soft covers adjust to be compatible with the front panel protective hard cover (Option UK9) and snap on battery pack
156 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options
(Agilent E1779B). Side ventilation allows for operation without removal, but the maximum operating temperature is reduced to 45
C.
Performance Bundle (Option B75)
Option B75 provides the pre-amplifier, narrow resolution bandwidths, and high stability frequency reference. Refer to Options 1DS, 1DR, and 1D5 for details.
This option is only available at time of purchase.
Phase Noise Measurement Personality (Option 226)
Option 226 provides an automatic log plot display of phase noise (dBc/Hz) vs. log offset frequency. It includes spot frequency and RMS noise. High Stability
Frequency Reference (Option 1D5) is recommended.
Pre-amplifier (Option 1DS)
The pre-amplifier improves the analyzer’s sensitivity (lowers the noise floor) by approximately 16 dB.
Rack Mount Kit With Handles (Option 1CP)
Option 1CP provides the parts necessary to mount the analyzer in an Agilent
System II cabinet or in a standard 19 inch (482.6 mm) equipment rack. It includes front handles and rack slides for added convenience.
RF and Digital Communications Hardware
(Option B74)
Option B74 includes the RF Communications Hardware (Option B7E), Digital
Signal Processing and Fast ADC (Option B7D), Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis
(Option 1D6), Memory Extension (Option B72), High Stability Frequency
Reference (Option 1D5), Preamplifier (Option 1DS), and Narrow Resolution
Bandwidth (Option 1DR) assemblies. These assemblies are required for optimum performance of the cdmaOne (Option BAC) or GSM measurement personality
(Option BAH).
RF Communications Hardware (Option B7E)
Option B7E provides the communications hardware required for many digital communication measurements. Option B7E must be ordered with Option B7D
(digital signal processing and fast ADC) and Option 1D5 (high stability frequency reference).
RS-232 and Parallel Interface (Option 1AX)
Option 1AX allows you to control your analyzer from a computer that uses an
RS-232 interface. It includes a 2.5 meter 9-pin (f) to 9-pin (f) connector RS-232
Chapter 4 157
Options and Accessories
How to Order Options cable (Agilent 5182-4794), a parallel interface connector for printers, a CD-ROM containing IntuiLink Toolbar software
1
, and the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers
Programmer’s Guide.
Option 1AX allows the analyzer to copy its display to a printer.
Service Documentation (Option 0BW)
Option 0BW provides a paper copy and PDF on CDROM version of the Agilent
ESA Spectrum Analyzers Service Guide. Also included is the ESA Specifications
Guide, Calibration Guide, and Instrument Messages and Functional Tests, and the
ESA Documentation Set on CDROM.
Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis (Option 1D6)
Option 1D6 allows you to selectively measure the spectrum of signals that may overlap in the frequency domain, but are separated in the time domain. By adjusting a time gate based on a user-supplied trigger signal, you can significantly increase the diagnostic capability of your spectrum analyzer for time-interleaved signals.
TV Trigger and Picture on Screen (Option B7B)
Option B7B requires Option BAA.
Option B7B allows you to trigger the analyzer sweep on a TV line of a demodulated TV waveform and view TV images in NTSC, PAL and SECAM standards on the analyzer display.
Option B7B provides the following additional ports:
EXT VIDEO IN/TV TRIG OUT - provides a shared baseband video input and a
TTL output for the TV trigger (output through 75
source impedance).
EXT VIDEO OUT - provides a detected video output (before the analog-to-digital conversion) proportional to the vertical deflection of the trace (similar to Option
BAA alone), and provides passthrough of the signal at EXT VIDEO IN/TV TRIG
OUT, if selected (75
).
158
1. This program allows you to download spectrum analyzer display or data files to a personal computer using Microsoft
Word or Microsoft Excel. Benchlink installation instructions are included with the CD-ROM.
Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
Accessories
Accessories
A number of accessories are available from Agilent Technologies to help you configure your analyzer for your specific applications. They can be ordered through your local Agilent Sales and Service Office and are listed below in alphabetical order by name.
50
/75 Minimum Loss Pad
The Agilent 11852B is a low VSWR minimum loss pad that allows you to make measurements on 75
devices using an analyzer with a 50 input. It is effective over a frequency range of dc to 2 GHz.
75
Matching Transformer
The Agilent 11694A allows you to make measurements in 75
systems using an analyzer with a 50
input. It is effective over a frequency range of 3 to 500 MHz.
AC Probe
The Agilent 85024A high frequency probe performs in-circuit measurements without adversely loading the circuit under test. The probe has an input capacitance of 0.7 pF shunted by 1 M
of resistance and operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz. High probe sensitivity and low distortion levels allow measurements to be made while taking advantage of the full dynamic range of the spectrum analyzer.
The Agilent 41800A low frequency probe has a low input capacitance and a frequency range of 5 Hz to 500 MHz.
Broadband Preamplifiers and Power Amplifiers
Preamplifiers and power amplifiers can be used with your spectrum analyzer to enhance measurements of very low-level signals.
The Agilent 8447D preamplifier provides a minimum of 25 dB gain from 100 kHz to 1.3 GHz.
The Agilent 87405A preamplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain from 10
MHz to 3 GHz. (Power is supplied by the probe power output of the analyzer.)
The Agilent 85905A CATV 75 ohm preamplifier provides a minimum of 18 dB gain from 45 MHz to 1 GHz. (Power is supplied by the probe power output of the analyzer.)
The 11909A low noise preamplifier provides a minimum of 32 dB gain from 9 kHz to 1 GHz and a typical noise figure of 1.8 dB.
Chapter 4 159
Options and Accessories
Accessories
Carrying Strap (Part Number E4401-60028)
This carrying strap comes with Options AYT and AYU. It can also be ordered separately and used with Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers.
External Keyboard
The HP C1405B keyboard is an IBM AT compatible keyboard that can be connected to the external keyboard connector on the front panel of the analyzer.
You may use any IBM AT compatible keyboard with a mini DIN connector. Screen titles and filenames can be entered with the external keyboard.
GPIB Cable
For use with Option A4H. The Agilent 10833 Series GPIB cables interconnect
GPIB devices and are available in four different lengths. GPIB cables are used to connect controllers to a spectrum analyzer.
Agilent 11970 Series Harmonic Mixers
The 11970 Series harmonic mixers are available to extend the frequency range of analyzers with Option AYZ (external mixing) up to 110 GHz. The following six models are available:
Table 4-2
Frequency Range Agilent Model
Number
11970K
11970A
11970Q
11970U
11970V
11970W
18.0 to 26.5 GHz
26.5 to 40.0 GHz
33.0 to 50.0 GHz
40.0 to 60.0 GHz
50.0 to 75.0 GHz
75.0 to 110 GHz
Agilent 11974 Series Preselected Millimeter Mixers
11974 Series preselected millimeter mixers are available to extend the frequency range of analyzers with Option AYZ (external mixing) up to 75 GHz. Preselection reduces mixer overload from broadband signals, reduces radiation of local oscillator harmonics back to the device under test, and reduces the level of image
160 Chapter 4
Options and Accessories
Accessories and multiple responses displayed. The following four models are available:
Table 4-3
Frequency Range Agilent Model
Number
11974A
11974Q
11974U
11974V
26.5 to 40.0 GHz
33.0 to 50.0 GHz
40.0 to 60.0 GHz
50.0 to 75.0 GHz
Agilent E1779BA Battery Pack
The E1779BA is a battery pack that will power an Agilent ESA spectrum analyzer for 80 to 114 minutes, depending on the options installed in the analyzer. Refer to the E1779BA Battery Pack User’s Guide for more information.
Parallel Interface Cable
For use with Option A4H and 1AX. The Agilent C2950A parallel interface cable is a 36-pin to 25-pin male-to-male 2 meter cable used to connect supported printers to a spectrum analyzer. This cable is IEEE-1284 compliant.
Printer
For use with Option A4H or 1AX. The DeskJet personal printers provide black and white or color printing for another form of permanent records of your test results. The HP LaserJet series printers are also compatible. The printers connect to the parallel interface installed on the spectrum analyzer with either Option
A4Hor 1AX.
RF and Transient Limiters
The Agilent 11867A and 11693A RF Limiters protect the spectrum analyzer input circuits from damage due to high power levels. The 11867A operates over a frequency range of dc to 1800 MHz and begins reflecting signal levels over 1 mW up to 10 W average power and 100 watts peak power. The 11693A microwave limiter (0.1 to 12.4 GHz, usable to 18 GHz) guards against input signals over
1 milliwatt up to 1 watt average power and 10 watts peak power.
The 11947A Transient Limiter protects the spectrum analyzer input circuits from damage due to signal transients. It specifically is needed for use with a line impedance stabilization network (LISN). It operates over a frequency range of 9 kHz to 200 MHz, with 10 dB of insertion loss.
Chapter 4 161
Options and Accessories
Accessories
RF Bridges
The Agilent 86205A 50
RF bridge and 86207A 75 RF bridge can be used to make reflection measurements using an analyzer with tracking generator Option
1DN or 1DQ or with an external signal generator. These external directional bridges offer high directivity and excellent port match. The 86205A operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 6 GHz. The 86207A operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz.
RS-232 Cable
For use with Option 1AX. The HP 24542G is a 3 meter 9-pin (f) to 25-pin (m)
RS-232 cable. The HP 24542U is a 3 meter 9-pin (f) to 9-pin (f) RS-232 cable for serial 9-pin PC connection to an analyzer. The modem cable required is HP
24542M 9-pin (f) to 25-pin (m), and the PC cable is HP 24542U. The Agilent
5182-4794 is a 2.5 meter 9-pin (f) to 9-pin (f) RS-232 cable for serial 9-pin PC connection to an analyzer (included with Option 1AX).
162 Chapter 4
5
Parts List
Chapter 5 163
Parts List
What You Will Find in This Chapter
What You Will Find in This Chapter
This chapter contains information for identifying and ordering replacement assemblies.
Major assembly location information is provided in
.
Component level information containing material lists, schematics, and component location diagrams, is available separately.
The following tables are included in this chapter:
•
Table 5-1 lists reference designator descriptions.
•
Table 5-2 lists abbreviations used in the parts list.
•
Table 5-3 lists value multipliers.
•
Table 5-4 lists replacement parts.
164 Chapter 5
Parts List
How to Order Parts
How to Order Parts
To order an assembly or mechanical part listed in this chapter, quote the Agilent
Technologies, Inc. part number and indicate the quantity required.
To order a part that is not listed, include the following information with the order: o Analyzer model number.
o Analyzer serial number.
o Description of where the part is located, what it looks like, and its function (if known).
o Quantity needed
Parts can be ordered by addressing the order to the nearest Agilent Technologies,
Inc. office. Customers within the USA can also use either the direct mail-order system, or the direct phone-order system described below. The direct phone-order system has a toll-free phone number available.
Direct Mail-Order System
Within the USA, Agilent Technologies, Inc. can supply parts through a direct mail-order system. Advantages of using the system are as follows: o Direct ordering and shipment from Agilent Technologies, Inc.
o No maximum or minimum on any mail order. (There is a minimum order amount for parts ordered through a local Agilent Technologies, Inc. office when the orders require billing and invoicing.) o Prepaid transportation. (There is a small handling charge for each order.) o No invoices.
To provide these advantages, a check or money order must accompany each order.
Mail-order forms and specific ordering information are available through your local Agilent Technologies, Inc. office.
Chapter 5 165
Parts List
How to Order Parts
Direct Phone-Order System
Within the USA, a phone order system is available for regular and hotline replacement parts service. A toll-free phone number is available, and Mastercard and Visa are accepted. Outside the USA, get in touch with your local sales and service office. Refer to
“Contacting Agilent Technologies” on page 241 .
Table 5-1
A Assembly
AT Attenuator, Isolator,
Limiter, Termination
B Fan, Motor
BT Battery
C Capacitor
CP Coupler
CR Diode, Diode
Thyristor, Step
Recovery Diode,
Varactor
DC Directional Coupler
DL Delay Line
DS Annunciator, Lamp,
Light Emitting
E
Diode (LED),
Signaling Device
(Visible)
Miscellaneous Electrical
Part
General Information
Reference Designations
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
R
RT
S
K
L
M
F
J
Fuse
FL Filter
HY Circulator
Electrical Connector
(Stationary Portion),
Jack
Relay
Coil, Inductor
Meter
MP Miscellaneous
Mechanical Part
P Electrical Connector
(Movable Portion), Plug
Q Silicon Controlled
Rectifier (SCR),
Transistor,
Triode Thyristor
Resistor
Thermistor
Switch
X
Y
T
TB
TC
TP
U
V
VR
W
Z
Transformer
Terminal Board
Thermocouple
Test Point
Integrated Circuit,
Microcircuit
Electron Tube
Breakdown Diode
(Zener),
Voltage Regulator
Cable, Wire,
Jumper
Socket
Crystal Unit
(Piezoelectric,
Quartz)
Tuned Cavity,
Tuned Circuit
166 Chapter 5
Table 5-2
A
A
ADJ
ANSI
CCP
CD
CER
CHAM
CHAR
CMOS
CNDCT
CONT
BRS
BSC
BTN
C
C
ASSY
AWG
B
BCD
BD
BE-CU
BNC
BRG
Abbreviations
Across Flats, Acrylic, Air
(Dry Method), Ampere
Adjust, Adjustment
American National Standards
Institue (formerly
USASI-ASA)
Assembly
American Wire Gage
Table 5-2
D
D
CONV
CPRSN
CUP-PT
CW
Binary Coded Decimal
Board, Bundle
Beryllium Copper
Type of Connector
Bearing, Boring
Brass
Basic
Button
DA
DAP-GL
DBL
DCDR
DEG
D-HOLE
DIA
DIP
DIP-SLDR
D-MODE
DO
DP
Capacitance, Capacitor,
Center Tapped, Cermet, Cold,
Compression
Carbon Composition Plastic
Cadmium, Card, Cord
Ceramic
Chamfer
Character, Characteristic,
Charcoal
Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor
Conducting, Conductive,
Conductivity, Conductor
Contact, Continuous Control,
Controller
F
F
DP3T
DPDT
DWL
E
E-R
EXT
Parts List
How to Order Parts
Abbreviations (Continued)
Converter
Compression
Cup Point
Clockwise, Continuous Wave
Deep, Depletion, Depth,
Diameter, Direct Current
Darlington
Diallyl Phthalate Glass
Double
Decoder
Degree
D-Shaped Hole
Diameter
Dual In-Line Package
Dip Solder
Depletion Mode
Package Type Designation
Deep, Depth, Diametric Pitch,
Dip
Double Pole Three Throw
Double Pole Double Throw
Dowell
E-Ring
Extended, Extension,
External, Extinguish
Fahrenheit, Farad, Female,
Film (Resistor), Fixed, Flange,
Frequency
Chapter 5 167
ID
IF
IN
INCL
FXD
G
GEN
GND
GP
H
H
HDW
HEX
HLCL
HP
I
IC
Table 5-2
FC
FDTHRU
FEM
FIL-HD
FL
FLAT-PT
FR
FREQ
FT
Parts List
How to Order Parts
Abbreviations (Continued)
Carbon Film/Composition,
Edge of Cutoff Frequency,
Face
Feedthrough
Female
Fillister Head
Flash, Flat, Fluid
Flat Point
Front
Frequency
Current Gain Bandwidth
Product (Transition
Frequency), Feet, Foot
Fixed
Table 5-2
INT
J
J-FET
JFET
General, Generator
Ground
General Purpose, Group
LK
LKG
LUM
M
M
L
LED
LG
LIN
K
K
KNRLD
KVDC
Henry, High
Hardware
Hexadecimal, Hexagon,
Hexagonal
Helical
Hewlett-Packard Company,
High Pass
Collector Current, Integrated
Circuit
Identification, Inside Diameter
Forward Current, Intermediate
Frequency
Inch
Including
MA
MACH
MAX
MC
MET
MHz
MINTR
MIT
MLD
MM
MOM
MTG
168
Abbreviations (Continued)
Integral, Intensity, Internal
Junction Field Effect
Transistor
Junction Field Effect
Transistor
Kelvin, Key, Kilo, Potassium
Knurled
Kilovolts Direct Current
Light Emitting Diode
Length, Long
Linear, Linearity
Link, Lock
Leakage, Locking
Luminous
Male, Maximum, Mega, Mil,
Milli, Mode
Milliampere
Machined
Maximum
Molded Carbon Composition
Metal, Metallized
Megahertz
Miniature
Miter
Mold, Molded
Magnetized Material,
Millimeter
Momentary
Mounting
Chapter 5
NS
PA
PAN-HD
PAR
PB
PC
PCB
P-CHAN
PD
PF
PKG
NUM
NYL
O
OA
OD
OP AMP
OPT
P
Table 5-2
N
N
MTLC
MW
N-CHAN
NH
NM
NO
NOM
NPN
Abbreviations (Continued) Table 5-2
Metallic
Milliwatt
PLSTC
PNL
PNP
Nano, None
N-Channel
Nanohenry
Nanometer, Nonmetallic
Normally Open, Number
Nominal
Negative Positive Negative
(Transistor)
Nanosecond, Non-Shorting,
Nose
Numeric
Nylon (Polyamide)
Q
R
PW
Q
R
POLYC
POLYE
POT
POZI
PREC
PRP
PSTN
PT
Over-All
Outside Diameter
Operational Amplifier
Optical, Option, Optional
Picoampere, Power Amplifier
Pan Head
Parallel, Parity
Lead (Metal), Pushbutton
Printed Circuit
Printed Circuit Board
P-Channel
Pad, Power Dissipation
Picofarad, Power Factor
Package
SEG
SGL
SI
SL
REF
RES
RF
RGD
RND
RR
RVT
S
SAWR
Chapter 5
Parts List
How to Order Parts
Abbreviations (Continued)
Plastic
Panel
Positive Negative Positive
(Transistor)
Polycarbonate
Polyester
Potentiometer
Pozidrive Recess
Precision
Purple, Purpose
Piston
Part, Point Pulse Time
Pulse Width
Figure of Merit
Range, Red, Resistance,
Resistor, Right, Ring
Reference
Resistance, Resistor
Radio Frequency
Rigid
Round
Rear
Rivet, Riveted
Surface Acoustic Wave
Resonator
Segment
Single
Silicon, Square Inch
Slide, Slow
169
TA
TC
THD
THK
TO
TPG
TR-HD
TRMR
TRN
TRSN
U
UCD
UF
Table 5-2
SLT
SMA
SMB
SMC
T
T
SPCG
SPDT
SPST
SQ
SST
STL
SUBMIN
SZ
Parts List
How to Order Parts
Abbreviations (Continued)
Slot, Slotted
Subminiature, A Type
(Threaded Connector)
Subminiature, B Type (Slip-on
Connector)
Subminiature, C-Type
(Threaded Connector)
Spacing
Single Pole DoubleThrow
Single Pole SingleThrow
Square
Stainless Steel
Steel
Subminiature
Size
Table 5-2
UH
UL
UNHDND
V
V
VAC
VAR
VDC
W
W
X
X
W/SW
WW
Teeth, Temperature,
Thickness,Time, Timed,
Tooth, Typical
Ambient Temperature,
Tantalum
Temperature Coefficient
Thread, Threaded
Thick
Package Type Designation
Tapping
Truss Head
Trimmer
Turn, Turns
Torsion
Y
YIG
Z
ZNR
Microcandela
Microfarad
Abbreviations (Continued)
Microhenry
Microliter, Underwriters’
Laboratories, Inc.
Unhardened
Variable, Violet, Volt, Voltage
Vacuum, Volts—Alternating
Current
Variable
Volts— Direct Current
Watt, Wattage, White,
Wide,Width
With Switch
Wire Wound
By (Used with Dimensions),
Reactance
Yttrium-Iron-Garnet
Zener
170 Chapter 5
Parts List
How to Order Parts
Table 5-3 da d c
M k
T
G
Abbreviation
Multipliers kilo deka deci centi tera
Prefix giga mega
MULTIPLIERS
Abbreviation Multiple
10
12
10
9
10
6
10
10
10
1
10
m
n p f a
Prefix milli micro nano pico femto atto
Multiple
10
10
6
10
9
10
12
10
15
10
18
Chapter 5 171
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4
Replaceable Parts
Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A1A1
A1A1A1
A1A1MP1
A1A1W1
A1A1A2
A1A2
A1A2A2
A1A2DS1
A1A2DS2
A1A2MP1
A1A3
A1A3MP9
A1A4
A1A5
Description
Agilent Part
Number
Front Panel Interface Board Kit
Rotary Pulse Generator
Backlight Inverter Shield
Backlight Inverter Cable
Volume Rotary Pulse Generator
Liquid Crystal Display Assembly Kit
(Serial Prefix
US4119)
Liquid Crystal Display Assembly Kits
(one each required)
(Serial Prefix
US4119)
Backlight Inverter Board
Display Backlight, Upper
• LCD with white backing on rear of LCD.
• LCD with metal backing and a distinct 1/4” step backlight is
2090-0380.
Display Backlight, Lower
LCD Bracket
Front Frame Assembly
(except Option 060)
(includes A1A3MP9)
Front Frame Assembly (50
)
(Option 060)
(includes A1A3MP9)
Lens/Keypad Assembly
(except Option 060)
Lens/Keypad Assembly
(Option 060)
Rear Frame Assembly
Shock Spreader Assembly
E4401-60241
1990-1865
E4401-00046
8120-8482
0960-0892
E4401-60242
0950-3644
E4401-60241
& E4401-60242
2090-0380
E4401-00034
E4401-60257
E4401-60259
E4401-60127
E4401-60256
E4401-60160
E4403-60032
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
172 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A1MP3
A1MP4
A1MP5
A1MP7
A1MP8
A1MP10
A1MP12
A1MP13
A1MP14
A1MP15
Description
Subpanel Kit
Flex Circuit, Main
Main Keypad
RPG Knob
Volume Knob
Front Panel Connector Cover
Media Bezel with Gasket
Volume Knob Gasket
Media Door
Tracking Generator I/O Hole Plug
Agilent Part
Number
E4401-60104
E4401-60198
E4401-40002
0370-3229
0370-3230
E4401-40006
E4401-60197
E4401-20044
E4401-40004
E4401-40020
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Chapter 5 173
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A1MP16
A1MP17
A1MP18
A1MP19
A1MP20
Description
Agilent Part
Number
Model ID Nameplate, 1.5 GHz (50
(E4411B)
Model ID Nameplate, 1.5 GHz (75
(E4411B) (Option 1DP)
Model ID Nameplate, 1.5 GHz (75
(E4411B) (Option HD x
)
Model ID Nameplate, 1.5 GHz (50
(E4401B)
Model ID Nameplate, 1.5 GHz (75
Option 1DP (E4401B)
Model ID Nameplate, 3.0 GHz (50
(E4402B)
Model ID Nameplate, 3.0 GHz (50
(E4402B) (Option UKB)
Model ID Nameplate, 3.0 GHz (50
(E4403B)
Model ID Nameplate, 6.7 GHz (50
(E4404B)
Model ID Nameplate, 6.7 GHz (50
(E4404B) (Option UKB)
Model ID Nameplate, 13.2 GHz
(50
(E4405B)
Model ID Nameplate, 13.2 GHz
(50
(E4405B) (Option UKB)
Model ID Nameplate, 26.5 GHz
(50
(E4407B)
Model ID Nameplate, 26.5 GHz
(50
(E4407B) (Option UKB)
Model ID Nameplate, 26.5 GHz
(50
(E4408B)
Front Frame Grounding Clip Kit
(5 pieces)
RF Input Connector Gasket (50
TG Output Connector Gasket (50
(Option 1DN)
Amptd Ref Out/Ext Mixer Gasket
E4411-80012
E4411-80013
E4411-80014
E4401-80027
E4401-80028
E4402-80002
E4403-80016
E4403-80008
E4404-80004
E4404-80008
E4405-80003
E4405-80006
E4407-80003
E4407-80006
E4408-80003
E4401-00054
E4403-20046
E4401-20089
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
174 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A1MP21
A2
A2A1
Description
Connector Label, (50
Connector Label, (75
Connector Label, 3 GHz
(except Option UKB)
Connector Label, 3 GHz
(Option UKB) (E4402B)
Connector Label, 6.7GHz
(except Option UKB)
Connector Label, 6.7GHz
(Option UKB)
Connector Label, 13.2 GHz
(except Option UKB)
Connector Label, 13.2 GHz
(Option UKB)
Connector Label, 26.5GHz
Connector Label, External Mixing
Connector (E4407B) (Option AYZ)
Connector Label, 26.5GHz
(E4407B) (Option UKB)
Connector Label, 26.5GHz
(E4407B) (Options UKB and AYZ)
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator
Assembly (50
) (Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator
Assembly (75
) (Option 1DQ)
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Control
Board Kit, (Option 1DN/1DQ)
3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Driver
Board Assy with shields,
(Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Driver
Board Assy with shields,
(Option 1DN) exchange
Agilent Part
Number
E4401-80003
E4401-80002
E4403-80002
E4403-80015
E4404-80001
E4404-80007
E4405-80001
E4405-80005
E4407-80001
E4407-80005
E4407-80007
E4407-80008
E4401-60128
E4401-60129
E4401-60131
E4403-60043
E4403-69043
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
X
X
X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Chapter 5 175
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A2A2
A2A3
A2J1
A2MP1
A2MP2
A2MP3
A2MP4
A2MP5
A2MP7
A2MP9
Description
Agilent Part
Number
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator RF
Board Kit (50
) (Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator RF
Board Kit (75
) (Option 1DQ)
3.0 GHz BITG Microcircuit
Assembly, (Option 1DN and not HSB)
3.0 GHz BITG Microcircuit,
(Option HSB)
1.5 GHz TG Output Board (50
)
(Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz TG Output Board (75
)
(Option 1DQ)
3.0 GHz TG Output Attenuator
(without Bracket A2MP5),
(Option 1DN)
Type-N Connector, 1.5 GHz TG RF
Output (50
) (Option 1DN)
BNC Connector, 1.5 GHz TG RF
Output (75
) (Option 1DQ)
Type-N Connector Kit, 3.0 GHz TG
RF Output, (Option 1DN)
Gasket–BNC, 1.5 GHz TG RF Output
Connector (75
) (Option 1DN/1DQ)
3.0 GHz TG Support Shield,
(Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz TG Cover Shield,
(Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz TG Center Shield,
(Options 1DN/1DQ)
3.0 GHz Attenuator Bracket
(Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz TG Control Shield,
(Options 1DN/1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG RF Shield,
(Options 1DN/1DQ)
E4401-60133
E4401-60134
E4403-60089
5087-7705
E4401-60135
E4401-60136
0955-0679
1250-2514
1250-2792
E4403-60015
E4401-20024
E4403-60007
E4403-60006
E4401-60052
E4403-00004
E4401-60051
E4401-60050
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
X X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
176 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
Description
Agilent Part
Number
A2W1
A2W2
A2W3
A2W4
A3
A4
A4A1
A4A2
A4MAU58
A5
A5B1
A5F1
A5F2
A5MP1
4
A6
A6MP1
A7
A7A1
Cable Assembly, 1.5 GHz TG
(Internal Ribbon) (Options 1DN/1DQ)
Cable Assembly, 3.0 GHz TG Power and Control (Wire Harness)
(Option 1DN)
Cable Assembly, 1.5 GHz TG
(Internal Coaxial)
(Options 1DN/1DQ)
Cable Assembly, 3.0 GHz TG LO
Drive (Semi-rigid) (Option 1DN)
Cable Assembly, 3.0 GHz TG RF
Output (Semi-rigid) (Option 1DN)
Cable Assembly, 3.0 GHz TG
Attenuator RF Output (Semi-rigid)
(Option 1DN)
8120-6944
E4403-60025
8120-6384
E4403-20072
E4403-20083
E4403-20073
E4403-20022
IF Assembly with Shields
Processor Assembly, Enhanced
Memory (Option B72)
12 MB Flash SIMM, (Option B72)
E4401-60401
E4401-60233
4 MB Flash SIMM
32 MB DRAM SIMM, (Option B72)
16 MB DRAM SIMM
3 V Lithium Battery
E4401-60081
E4401-60105
1818-6431
1818-6430C
1420-0556
Power Supply Assembly E4401-60222
Fan 3160-0866
Fuse (dc) 20 A, 32 V
DC Fuse kit w/label
Fuse (Line) 5 A, 250 V
Plastic Rivet
2110-1317
E4401-60286
2110-0709
0361-1814
Speaker/Floppy Assembly
Transportation Disk
Motherboard (ESA E-Series)
Motherboard (ESA L-Series)
IF Video Sweep Ports, (Option A4J)
E4401-60368
1150-1806
E4401-60107
E4411-60013
E4401-60096
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Chapter 5 177
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A7A2
A7A3
A7A4
A7A5
A7A6
A7A7
A7A8
A7A9
A7A10
A7A11
A7A12
A7A13
A8
A8A1
A8A1W1
A8A1W2
A8A1W3
Description
Agilent Part
Number
GPIB Assembly, (Option A4H)
RS-232 Assembly, (Option 1AX)
Frequency Extension Assembly
Fast ADC Assembly, (Option AYX) a
FM Demod Assembly, (Option BAA) a
Digital Demod DSP Assembly,
(Option B7D) c
Digital Demod RF Assembly,
(Option B7E) d
ACPR Dynamic Range Extension
Assembly, (Option 120)
Bluetooth FM Demodulator
Quasi Peak Detector Assembly,
(Option HYQ)
IF Out Assembly
(Option H55)
IF Out Assembly
(Option H70)
Noise Source Driver,
(part of Option 219)
1.5 GHz RF Assembly (50
)
1.5 GHz RF Exchange Assembly
(50
)
1.5 GHz RF Assembly (75
)
(Option 1DP)
Precision Frequency Reference,
(Option 1D5) e
3 GHz RF Complete Assy with
Precision Frequency Reference
Cable Assy, 50 MHz Amptd
Reference Signal (Braided Coax)
Cable Assy, 600 MHz Reference
Signal (Braided Coax)
Cable Assy, 21.4 MHz Cal Signal
(Braided Coax)
E4401-60367
E4401-60366
E4404-60001
E4401-60083
E4401-60343 b
E4401-60088
E4401-60295
E4403-60065
E4401-60223
E7401-60003
E4403-60076
E4404-60034
E4401-60123
E4401-60402
E4401-69294
E4401-60100
E4401-60036
E4403-60087
E4403-60020
E4403-60020
E4403-60020
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
178 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A8A1W4
A8A2
A8A3
A8A4
A8A5
A8A6
A8FL1
A8J1
A8J10
A8MP1
Description
Agilent Part
Number
Cable/Connector Assy, 50 MHz
External Amptd Ref Out Signal
Second Converter dc Block (except Option UKB)
LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS)
RF Input APC-3.5 Connector Kit,
(Option BAB)
Type-N Connector, RF Input (50
)
BNC Connector, RF Input (75
)
Micro Bracket
Micro Bracket (Option UKB)
5062-0721
5086-7958
E4403-60026
E4404-60030
LO Amplifier/IF Switch (LOIS)
3 GHz Input Attenuator
(except Option UKB)
E4404-69030
33321-60051
3 GHz Input Attenuator (Option UKB) 33321-60052
33321-60052
33321-60057
6.7/13.2 GHz Input Attenuator
26.5 GHz Input Attenuator
(except Option UKB)
26.5 GHz Input Attenuator
(Option UKB)
6.7/13.2 GHz YIG-Tuned Harmonic
Mixer (RYTHM)
6.7/13.2 GHz YIG-Tuned Harmonic
Mixer (RYTHM) Exchange
26.5 GHz YIG-Tuned Harmonic
Mixer (RYTHM)
26.5 GHz YIG-Tuned Harmonic
Mixer (RYTHM) Exchange
3.1 GHz Low Pass Filter (LPF)
33321-60061
5087-7034
5087-6034
5087-7031
5087-6031
0955-0988
E4403-60015 RF Input Type-N Connector Kit
(50
) (except Option 060)
RF Input Type-N Connector (50
)
(Option 060)
86290-60005
E4407-60002
1250-2514
1250-2792
E4404-00001
E4404-00001
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
Chapter 5 179
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
A8MP2
A8MP3
A8MP4
A8MP5
A8MP15
A8MP24
MP1
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP8
MP9
MP10
W1
W2
Description
Agilent Part
Number
Sub Bracket
Sub Bracket (Option UKB)
Filter Clamp
Filter Clamp (Option UKB)
Attenuator Bracket
(except Option UKB)
Filter Bracket (except Option UKB)
Connector Cover, 1.5 GHz RF Input
Type-N Connector Gasket, RF Input
(50
)
BNC Connector Gasket, RF Input
(75
)
Chassis Cover, Inner Shield
(Serial
US/MY41060000)
Chassis & Dress Cover Kit,
(Serial
US41060000)
Dress Cover Kit
(Serial
US41060000)
Ergonomic Handle Including Dress
Cover Hardware Kit to mount handle.
Chassis
Vibration Support
Rear Blank Panel
Handle Assembly, Ergonomic Design
Dress Cover Hardware (For mounting ergonomic handle)
Cable Assembly, Processor to Front
Panel Interface (Ribbon Cable)
Cable Assembly, 21.4 MHz IF, RF to
IF (Flexible Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, 21.4 MHz IF, RF to
IF (Flexible Coaxial)
E4404-00003
E4404-00003
5022-3619
5022-3619
E4403-00001
E4403-00007
E4401-00021
E4403-20046
E4401-20024
E4401-00067
E4401-60265
E4401-60266
E4401-60246
E4401-00045
E4401-40026
E4401-00059
E4401-60246
E4401-60409
8120-6919
8120-6153
E4402-60020
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X
180 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
W3 f
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
Description
Agilent Part
Number
Cable Assembly, Front Panel Interface to Display (Ribbon Cable)
(Serial
US41190000)
Cable Assembly, Front Panel Interface to Display (Ribbon Cable)
(Serial
US41190000)
Cable Assembly, RF Power and
Control (Ribbon Cable)
Cable Assembly, RF Power and
Control (Ribbon Cable)
Cable Assembly, Attenuator and 2nd
Converter Power and Control
(Ribbon Cable)
Cable Assembly, Attenuator and 2nd
Converter Power and Control
(Ribbon Cable)
(E4407B Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, Attenuator and 2nd
Converter Power and Control
(Ribbon Cable)
Cable Assembly, RF Input
(Semi-rigid Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, RF Input
(Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, RF Input
(Semi-rigid Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, RF Input
(Semi-rigid Coaxial) (Option BAB)
Cable Assembly, RF Input
(Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(except Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, Filtered Low Band
RF Input (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(except Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, Filtered Low Band
RF Input (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, Filtered Low Band
RF Input (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(except Option UKB)
E4401-60198
E4401-60243
8120-6943
E4403-60018
E4403-60019
E4404-60004
E4404-60004
E4404-20009
E4404-20009
E4404-20022
E4404-20017
E4403-20026
E4403-20028
E4403-20058
E4404-20015
X
X
X
X X X
X X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Chapter 5 181
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
W9
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14
W15
W16
W17
W18
W19
W20
W21
W22
Description
Agilent Part
Number
Cable Assembly, 3.9107 GHz IF
(Semi-rigid Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, 600 MHz 2nd LO
Drive (Flexible Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, 2nd Converter
321.4 MHz IF Output
(Flexible Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, 600 MHz TG Drive
(Flexible Coaxial) (Option 1DN)
Cable Assembly, 3.0 GHz TG 1st LO
Drive (Braided Coaxial),
(Option 1DN)
Cable Assembly, DC Blocked RF
Input (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(except Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, RF Attenuator
Output (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(except Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, RF Attenuator
Output (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, RYTHM/LOIS
Power and Control
Cable Assembly, RF Attenuator
Output (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(E4407B Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, RF Attenuator
Output (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(except Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, RYTHM Low Band
Output (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, DC Blocked RF
Input (Semi-rigid Coaxial)
(except Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, RYTHM 321.4 MHz
IF Output (Flexible Coaxial)
LOIS 321.4 MHz IF Output
(Flexible Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, RYTHM LO
(Semi-rigid Coaxial)
E4403-20029
8120-8674
8120-8674
E4402-60022
E4403-20023
E4403-20030
E4403-20027
E4403-20059
E4404-60003
E4404-20014
E4404-20018
E4404-20003
E4404-20004
8120-8674
E4404-60008
E4404-20005
182
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
W23
W25
W26
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
Description
Agilent Part
Number
Cable Assembly, Auxiliary LO Output
(Semi-rigid Coaxial)
Cable Assembly, OCXO (Power and
Control) (Option 1D5)
Cable Assembly, OCXO (Flexible
Coaxial) (Option 1D5)
Digital Demod RF Input (Flexible
Coaxial) (Option B7E)
50 MHz External Amptd Ref Out Kit
Signal (Flexible Coaxial)
(Option B7E)
Digital Demod IF Input
(Flexible Coaxial) (Option B7E)
Digital Demod IF Output
(Flexible Coaxial) (Option B7E)
Digital Demod DSP Sample Rate
(Flexible Coaxial) (Option B7D)
Digital Demod DSP IF
(Flexible Cable) (Option B7D)
Cable Assembly, Filtered Low Band
RF Input (semi-rigid coaxial)
(Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, Filtered Low Band
RF Input (semi-rigid coaxial)
(Option UKB)
Cable Assembly, Filtered 600 MHz
2nd LO Drive (flexible cable)
(Option 120)
Cable Assembly, 600 MHz 2nd LO
Drive (flexible cable) (Option 120)
Cable Assembly, Ext Mixer LO OUT
(Option AYZ)
Cable Assembly, Ext Mixer IF INPUT
(Option AYZ)
Cable Assembly, 2nd Converter Out
(Option H55, H70)
Cable Assembly, A7A12 321.4 MHz
Out (Option H55, H70)
E4404-20008
E4401-60043
8120-5024
E4402-60024
E4402-60023
E4402-60021
8120-8866
8120-8867
E4402-60027
E4403-20058
E4404-20026
E4402-60026 g
E4402-60025
E4404-20006
8120-5141
E4440-60411
E4440-60411
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X X
X X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Chapter 5 183
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-4 Assembly Level Replaceable Parts
Reference
Designator
Description
Agilent Part
Number
W42 Cable Assembly, Downconverted IF
Out (Option H55, H70)
E4440-60413 X X X X X a. ESA-E Series (E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B only).
b. E4401-60343 includes E4401-60338 BAA ROM kit.
c. Requires Option B7E, (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B only).
d. Requires Option B7D, (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B only).
e. Serial prefix > MY5014 & SG5014 added diode batches and epoxy to the driver board to reduce EMF spikes. The attenuator part number did not change.
f. Place adhesive on each end of cable connector and LCD connector to eliminate the risk of the cable unplugging.
g. ESA-E Series part (E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B only)
184 Chapter 5
Figure 5-1 Front Frame with Hardware, E4411B, and E4401B
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-5
Item
1
2
Table 5-5 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
.
Description
Screw - M3 X 10 mm
(TORX Flat Head)
Screw - M3 X 8 mm
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Part Number
0515-2600
0515-0372
Chapter 5 185
Figure 5-2
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Front Frame with Hardware, E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B
Table 5-6
Item
Reference
Designator
3
4
1
2
A1A5
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
Description
Screw - M3 X 10 mm (TORX Flat Head)
Screw - M3 X 8 mm
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Shock Spreader Assembly
Screw - M4 X 12 mm
Part Number
0515-2600
0515-0372
0515-0943
186 Chapter 5
Figure 5-3 Front Panel Parts
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-7 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 187
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
15
16
17
11
12
13
14
Table 5-7
Item
3
4
5
1
2
Reference
Designator
A1A1
A1A2
A1A1A1
A1A1A2
A1A2DS1 and A1A2DS2
Description
Front Panel Interface Assembly
Liquid Crystal Display Assembly Kit
(Serial Prefix
US4119)
(includes Backlights and Inverter Board)
Liquid Crystal Display Assembly Kits (one each required)
(Serial Prefix
US4119)
(includes Backlights and Inverter Board)
Rotary Pulse Generator
Volume Rotary Pulse Generator
Display Backlights
8
9
10
6
7
A1MP13
A1MP3
A1MP4
A1MP5
A1A3 a
A1MP12
A1MP14
A1MP7
A1MP8
A1MP10
A8A1W4
A1MP15
Gasket–Volume RPG
Sub Panel (2 pieces)
Front Panel Interface Board Subpanel and LCD Subpanel
Flex Circuit, Main
Main Keypad
Front Frame Assembly (except Option 060)
Front Frame Assembly (Option 060)
Media Bezel with Gasket
Media Door
RPG Knob
Volume Knob
Front Panel Connector Cover
Amptd Ref Out Connector
Tracking Generator I/O Hole Plug
Part Number
, and
188 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-7
Item
(Continued)
Reference
Designator
18
19
20
A1A3MP9
A1A2MP1
Description
Nameplate 1.5 GHz (75
) (E4401B)
Nameplate 3.0 GHz (E4402B) (except Option UKB)
Nameplate 3.0 GHz (E4402B) (Option UKB)
Nameplate 3.0 GHz (E4403B)
Nameplate 6.7 GHz (E4404B) (except Option UKB)
Nameplate 6.7 GHz (E4404B) (Option UKB)
Nameplate 13.2 GHz (E4405B) (except Option UKB)
Nameplate 13.2 GHz (E4405B) (Option UKB)
Nameplate 26.5 GHz (E4407B) (except Option UKB)
Nameplate 26.5 GHz (E4407B) (Option UKB)
Nameplate 26.5 GHz (E4408B)
Nameplate 1.5 GHz (E4411B) (50
)
Nameplate 1.5 GHz (E4411B) (75
)
Lens/Keypad Assembly (50
)
Lens/Keypad Assembly (50
) (Option 060)
LCD Bracket
Part Number
Chapter 5 189
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-7 (Continued)
Item
Reference
Designator
Description Part Number
21 A1A2MP21 Connector Label, 1.5 GHz (50
) (E4401B, E4411B)
Connector Label, 1.5 GHz (75
) (E4401B, E4411B)
Connector Label, 3 GHz (except Option UKB) (E4402B,
E4403B)
Connector Label, 3 GHz (Option UKB) (E4402B)
Connector Label, 6.7 GHz (except Option UKB)
(E4404B)
Connector Label, 6.7 GHz (Option UKB) (E4404B)
Connector Label, 13.2 GHz (except Option UKB)
(E4405B)
Connector Label, 13.2 GHz (Option UKB) (E4405B)
Connector Label, 26.5 GHz (E4407B, E4408B)
Connector Label, 26.5 GHz (Option AYZ) (E4407B)
Connector Label, 26.5 GHz (Option UKB) (E4407B)
Connector Label, 26.5 GHz (Option UKB and AYZ)
(E4407B)
Backlight Inverter Board
22
23
A1A2A2
A1A1MP1 Backlight Inverter Board Shield
0950-3644
E4401-00046 a. Front Frame Assembly also includes the following:
Front Frame
Main Keypad Label (the piece around the outside of the keys)
Media Bezel with Gasket (see A1MP12)
Media Door (see A1MP14)
Front Panel Connector Cover (see A1MP10)
Tracking Generator I/O Hole Plug (see A1MP15)
RF Input Connector Gasket (see A1MP18)
Tracking Generator Output Connector Gasket (see A1MP19)
Amptd Ref Out/Ext Mixer Gasket (E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, E4408B) (see A1MP20)
Lens/keypad assembly (see A1A3MP9)
Grounding Clip (see A1MP17)
190 Chapter 5
Figure 5-4 Rear Frame with Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Chapter 5 191
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-8
Item
1
2
Reference Designator
A1A4
3
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
Description
Rear Frame Assy
Screw–M4 X 12 mm (4 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Handle assembly
Part Number
0515-0382
192 Chapter 5
Figure 5-5 Front Panel with Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-9 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 193
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
13
14
15
16
17
9
10
11
12
Table 5-9
Item
1
18
19
7
8
5
6
2
3
4
Reference
Designator
A1A2DS1 and A1A2DS2
A1A2MP1
A1A2
A1MP3
A1MP4
A1A3MP9
A1MP17
A1A3
A1MP18
A1MP19
A1MP20
A1MP5
A1A1
A1A2A2
A1A1MP1
A1MP13
A1A1W1
Description Part Number
Display Backlights
LCD Bracket
Liquid Crystal Display Assembly Kit
(Serial Prefix
US4119)
(includes Backlights and Inverter Board)
Liquid Crystal Display Assembly Kits
(one each required)
(Serial Prefix
US4119)
(includes Backlights and Inverter Board)
Sub Panel (2 pieces) Front Panel Interface Board
Subpanel and LCD Subpanel
Flex Circuit, Main
Lens/Keypad Assembly (except Option 060)
Lens/Keypad Assembly, (Option 060)
Grounding Clip Kit (5 pieces)
Front Frame Assembly (except Option 060)
Front Frame Assembly (Option 060)
RF Input Connector Gasket
TG Output Connector Gasket
Amptd Ref Out/Ext Mixer Gasket
Main Keypad
Front Panel Interface Board Assy
Backlight Inverter Board for 2090-0379
Backlight Inverter Board Shield
Screws - M2.5 X 6 (6 required) (TORX Pan Head)
Screws - M3 X 8 mm (14 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Gasket - Volume RPG
Cable, Backlight Inverter Board to Front Panel Interface
Board
(A1A1),
E4401-20044
8120-8482
0950-3644
E4401-00046
0515-0366
0515-0372
194 Chapter 5
Figure 5-6 Inner Shield with Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 195
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-10
Item
1
2
Reference
Designator
MP1
3
Description
Chassis Cover (Inner Shield)
Screw - M3 X 10 mm (3 required)
(TORX Flat Head)
Screw - M3 X 8 mm (12 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Part Number
0515-2600
0515-0372
196 Chapter 5
Figure 5-7 Motherboard Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-11 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 197
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-11
Item
1
Reference Designator
A7
2
3
MP6
Description
Motherboard, ESA-E Series (shown here)
Motherboard, ESA-L Series
Chassis
Screw - M3 X 8 mm
(TORX Pan Head with
Crest Washer)
Part Number
0515-0372
198 Chapter 5
Figure 5-8 Rear Panel with Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 199
5
6
Not shown
7
8
9
3
4
1
2
Table 5-12
Item
Reference
Designator
A5B1
A5
A6
A4
10
11
A7A2
A7A3
MP8
MP7
A7A1
A2
W4
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Description
Fan
Power Supply Assy
Speaker/Floppy Assembly
Main Processor Board
Main Processor Board with Enhanced Memory
GPIB Board Assembly, (Option A4H)
RS 232 Assembly, (Option 1AX)
Rear Blank Panels
Vibration Support Bar
IF Video Sweep Ports, (Option A4J)
Tracking Generator Assembly
1.5 GHz 50
, (Option 1DN)
Tracking Generator Assembly
1.5 GHz 75
, (Option 1DQ)
RF Power and Control Ribbon Cable,
A7J4 to A8A1A1P6 & A8A1A2J1 (E4402B, E4403B,
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, E4408B)
RF Power and Control Ribbon Cable, A7J4 to A8J4
(E4401B and E4411B)
Screw - M3 X 8 mm (10 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Part Number
3160-0866
E4401-60222
E4401-60008
0515-0372
200 Chapter 5
Figure 5-9 Speaker/Floppy Board with Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-13
Item
Reference
Designator
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Description Part Number
1
2 A6
Screw - M3 X 8 mm (4 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Speaker/Floppy Assembly
0515-0372
Chapter 5 201
Figure 5-10
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
RF Assembly with Hardware, E4401B and E4411B
Table 5-14 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
Table 5-14
Item
1
Reference
Designator
2
3
A8
A8J10
Description
Screw - M3 X 25 mm (6 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
1.5 GHz RF Assembly, 50
1.5 GHz RF Exchange Assembly, 50
1.5 GHz RF Assembly, 75
, (Option 1DP)
RF Input Type-N Connector, 50
RF Input BNC Connector, 75
Part Number
0515-0667
202 Chapter 5
Figure 5-11 RF Input Connector Hardware (E4401B and E4411B) and Precision Frequency Reference, Option 1D5 (E4401B)
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
Chapter 5 203
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
5
6
3
4
7
10
11
8
9
Table 5-15
Item
1
2
Reference
Designator
A8J10
W26
W4
W25
W2
A8MP15
A8A1
Description
Screw - M2.5 X 8 mm (TORX Flat Head) (4 required)
Connector, Type-N (50
)
Connector, BNC (75
)
1.5 GHz RF Input Connector Cover
Screw - M3 X 8 mm (TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
(2 required)
Precision Frequency Reference Cable, Flexible Coax, A8A1 to
A8 (E4401B)
Cable Assembly, RF Power and Control, Ribbon Cable
(E4401B)
Precision Frequency Reference Power Harness, A8A1 to
A8(E4401B)
21.4 MHz IF Input Coax A8J3 to A3J2
Screws, M3 X 8 mm (5 required)
Precision Frequency Reference Cover Shield (E4401B)
A8A1.5 GHz Precision Frequency Reference Assembly,
(Option 1D5) (E4401B)
Part Number
0515-2487
0515-0372
0515-0372
E4401-00055
204 Chapter 5
Figure 5-12
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
3 GHz RF Assembly with Hardware, E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B,
E4407B, and E4408B
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 205
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-16
Item
1
Reference
Designator
A8A1
2
3
A8A1W1
A8A1W2
A8A1W3
A8A1W4
Description Part Number
3 GHz RF Complete Assy with Precision Frequency Reference
50 MHz Cal Signal Cable, Braided Coax
A8A1A2J7 to A8A1A1J1
600 MHz Reference Cable, Braided Coax
A8A1A1J5 to A8A1A2J8
21.4 MHz Cal Signal Cable, Braided Coax
A8A1A2J6 to A8A1A1J6
50 MHz External Amptd Ref Out Signal Cable Connector
A8A1A2J4 to A8J2
SMB/BNC Amptd Ref Cable
O-Ring
Flat Washer
Hex Nut
5062-0721
0900-0016
2190-0119
2950-0035
206 Chapter 5
Table 5-16
Item
4
5
(Continued)
Reference
Designator
A8J1 shown here
A8J1
A8J1
Description
Type-N RF Input Connector Kit (50
)
(except Option 060)
Type-N Connector
Lock Washer
Hex Nut
Sleeve
EMI O-Ring
Type-N RF Input Connector (Option 060)
Type-N Connector
Lock Washer
Hex Nut
Wavy Washer
Type-N Spacer
Conductive Washer
RF Input APC-3.5 Connector Kit,
(Option BAB) (E4407B, E4408B)
Connector
Block
Nut
M3 X 18 Flathead Torque Screw (2 required)
SMM3 X 14 mm Screws (88 required)
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Part Number
2190-0104
2950-0132
3050-2127
5022-6164
E4402-20010
0515-2994
Chapter 5 207
Figure 5-13
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
RF Major Assemblies and Cables, Rear View, E4402B and E4403B
Table 5-17 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
Table 5-17
Item
Reference
Designator
1
2
3
W5
W11
Description
Attenuator and 2 nd
Converter Power and Control, Ribbon Cable
Screws - M3 X 22 mm (2 required)
(TORX Pan Head with
Crest Washer)
2 nd
Converter 321.4 MHz IF Output
Cable, Flexible Coax
Cable Runs
From
A8A1A1J2
To
A8A5J3 and
A8A2J6
Part Number
0515-2693
A8A2J2 A8A1A1P2
208 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-17
Item
Reference
Designator
13
14
15
8
9
6
7
10
4
5
11
12
16
17
18
A8A5
W15
A8MP5
A8MP4
A8FL1
A8A2
W14
W8
A8A3
W9
W2
W12
W4
(Continued)
Description
Cable Runs
From To
3 GHz Input Attenuator
RF Attenuator Output,
Semi-rigid Coax
Filter Bracket
Attenuator Bracket
3.1 GHz Low Pass Filter
Second Converter
Screws - M3 X 10 mm (10 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest
Washer)
DC Blocked RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
Filtered Low Band RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax dc Filter Block
3.9 GHz IF Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
Screws - M3 X 10 mm (2 required)
(TORX Pan Head with Crest
Washer)
21.4 MHz IF, RF to IF Cable,
Flexible Coax
600 MHz Tracking Generator Drive
Cable, Flexible Coax, (Option 1DN)
RF Power & Control Cable, 40-pin
Ribbon Cable
A8A5J2
A8A3J2
A8FL1J1
A8A1A2J3
A8A1A1P5
A8A1A1P3
A7J4
A8FL1J2
A8A5J1
A8A1A2J2
A8A2J1
A3J2
A2A2J5
A8A1A1P6 and
A8A1A2J1
Part Number
0515-0372
0515-2134
Chapter 5 209
Figure 5-14
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Microwave RF Major Assemblies, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B
Table 5-18
Item
3
4
1
2
Reference
Designator
A8A3
A8FL1
A8MP3
A8MP1
Table 5-18 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
Description dc Block (except Option UKB)
3.1 GHz Low Pass Filter
Filter Clamp
Micro Bracket
Part Number
210 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-18
Item
5
Reference
Designator
A8A6
(Continued)
6
7
8
9
A8A2
A8MP2
A8A5
A8A4
Description
6.7/13.2 GHz Routing YIG-Tuned Harmonic Mixer
(RYTHM) (E4404B, E4405B)
6.7/13.2 GHz Routing YIG-Tuned Harmonic Mixer
(RYTHM) Exchange Part
(E4404B, E4405B)
26.5 GHz Routing YIG-Tuned Harmonic Mixer
(RYTHM) (E4407B, E4408B)
26.5 GHz Routing YIG-Tuned Harmonic Mixer
Exchange Part (RYTHM) (E4407B, E4408B)
Second Converter
Sub-bracket
6.7/13.2 GHz Input Attenuator
(E4404B, E4405B)
26.5 GHz Input Attenuator (except Option UKB)
(E4407B, E4408B)
26.5 GHz Input Attenuator (Option UKB)
(E4407B)
LO Amp/IF Switch
Part Number
Chapter 5 211
Figure 5-15
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Microwave RF Assembly Bottom View, Semi-rigid Cables
E4402B and E4403B
Table 5-19
Item
Reference
Designator
Table 5-19 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
1
2
3
4
W8
W9
W7
W10
Description
Cable Runs
From
A8FL1J1
To
A8A1A2J2 Filtered Low Band RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
3.9 GHz IF Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
600 MHz 2 nd
LO Drive Cable,
Flexible Coax
A8A1A2J3
A8J1
A8A1A1P1
A8A2J1
A8A3J1
A8A2J4
Part Number
212 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-19
Item
Reference
Designator
5
6
7
8
9
10
A8A1W4
W11
W15
W5
W12
W2
(Continued)
Cable Runs
Description
From
A8A1A2J4 50 MHz External Amptd Ref Out
Signal Cable/Connector, Flexible
Coax
2 nd
Converter 321.4 MHz IF Output
Cable, Flexible Coax
RF Attenuator Output, Semi-rigid
Coax
Attenuator and 2 nd
Converter Power and Control, Ribbon Cable
600 MHz Tracking Generator Drive
Cable, Flexible Coax, Option 1DN
21.4 MHz IF, RF to IF Cable,
Flexible Coax
A8A2J2
A8A5J2
A8A1A1J2
A8A1A1P3
A8A1A1P5
To
A8J2
A8A1A1P2
A8FL1J2
A8A5J3 and A8A2J6
A2A2J5
A3J2
Part Number
Chapter 5 213
Figure 5-16
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Microwave RF Assembly Front View, Semi-rigid Cables
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B
Table 5-20 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
214 Chapter 5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-20
Item
1
Reference
Designator
W19
2
3
4
5
6
7
W17
W23
W6
W8
W18
W24
Description
From To
Part Number dc Blocked RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RF Attenuator Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax (E4404B,
E4405B)
RF Attenuator Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax (E4407B,
E4408B)
Aux LO Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
(E4404B, E4405B)
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
(E4407B, E4408B)
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax,
(Option BAB) (E4407B, E4408B)
Filtered Low Band RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RYTHM Low Band Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RYTHM LO Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
A8FL1J2
A8A6J3
A8A6J3
A8A4J1
A8A5J1
A8A5J1
A8A5J1
A8A1A2J2
A8FL1J1
A8A6J4
A8A3J2
A8A5J2
A8A5J2
A8A1A2J5
A8J1
A8J1
A8J1
A8A3J1
A8A6J2
A8A4J2
Chapter 5 215
Figure 5-17
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Microwave RF Assembly Front View, Semi-rigid Cables
Option UKB E4402B
Table 5-21
Item
1
Reference
Designator
W15
Table 5-21 provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part
number for the items called out in
Description
From
A8A5J2
To
A8FL1J1
Part Number
2
3
W8
W6
RF Attenuator Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
Filtered Lowband Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
A8FL1J2
A8A5J1
A8A1A2J2
A8J1
216 Chapter 5
Figure 5-18 Microwave RF Assembly Front View, Semi-rigid Cables
Option UKB E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 217
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-22
Item
1
Reference
Designator
W35
2
3
4
5
6
W17
W23
W6
W18
W22
Description
Filtered Low Band RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RF Attenuator Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax (E4404B,
E4405B)
RF Attenuator Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax (E4407B)
Aux LO Output Cable, Semi-rigid
Coax
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
(E4404B, E4405B)
RYTHM Low Band Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RYTHM LO Cable, Semi-rigid
Coax
From
A8FL1J2
A8A6J3
A8A6J3
A8A4J1
A8A5J1
A8FL1J1
A8A6J4
To
Part Number
A8A1A2J2
A8A5J2
A8A5J2
A8A1A2J5
A8J1
A8A6J2
A8A4J2
218 Chapter 5
Figure 5-19 Microwave RF Assembly Rear View, Semi-rigid Cables
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 219
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-23
Item
1
2
Reference
Designator
W22
W18
3
4
5
6
7
8
W6
W8
W9
W23
W17
W19
Description
RYTHM LO Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
RYTHM Low Band Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
(E4404B, E4405B)
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
(E4407B, E4408B)
RF Input Cable, Semi-rigid Coax,
(Option BAB) (E4407B, E4408B)
Filtered Low Band RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
3.9 GHz IF Cable, Semi-rigid Coax
Aux LO Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
RF Attenuator Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax (E4404B, E4405B)
RF Attenuator Output Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax (E4407B, E4408B) dc Blocked RF Input Cable,
Semi-rigid Coax
From
A8A4J2
A8A6J2
A8J1
A8J1
A8J1
A8A3J1
A8A1A2J3
A8A1A2J5
A8A5J2
A8A5J2
A8A3J2
To
A8A6J4
A8FL1J1
Part Number
A8A5J1
A8A5J1
A8A5J1
A8A1A2J2
A8A2J1
A8A4J1
A8A6J3
A8A6J3
A8FL1J2
220 Chapter 5
Figure 5-20
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Microwave RF Assembly Front View, Flexible Coaxial Cables
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 221
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
1
Table 5-24
Item
Reference
Designator
W21
2
3
4
5
6
W2
W12
A8A1W4
W13
W20
Description
From
LOIS 321.4 MHz IF Output Cable,
Flexible Coax
21.4 MHz IF, RF to IF Cable,
Flexible Coax
600 MHz Tracking Generator Drive
Cable, Flexible Coax, (Option 1DN)
50 MHz External Amptd Ref Out Kit
Signal Cable/Connector, Flexible Coax
3.0 GHz Tracking Generator 1 st
LO
Drive Cable, Braided Coax,
(Option 1DN)
RYTHM 321.4 MHz IF Output Cable,
Flexible Coax
A8A4J7
A8A1A1P5
A8A1A1P3
A8A1A2J4
A8A4J3
A8A6J1
To
A8A2J3
A3J2
A2A2J5
A8J2
A2A1J3
A8A4J5
Part Number
222 Chapter 5
Figure 5-21
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Microwave Option B74 RF Assembly Front View, Flexible Coaxial Cables
E4402B, E4404B, E4405B and E4407B
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 223
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-25
Item
1
Reference
Designator
W33
2
3
4
5
6
W34
W30
W29
W32
W31
Description
From To
Digital Demod DSP Sample Rate
(Flexible Coaxial) (Option B7D)
Digital Demod DSP IF
(Flexible Cable) (Option B7D)
50 MHz External Amptd Ref Out Kit
Signal (Flexible Coaxial)
(Option B7E)
Digital Demod RF Input (Flexible
Coaxial) (Option B7E)
Digital Demod IF Output (Flexible
Coaxial) (Option B7E)
21.4 MHz IF, RF to IF In Cable,
(Flexible Coaxial)
A7A7P4
A7A7P5
A8A1A2J4
A8A8A2J4
A3J2
A7A8J12
A7A8J5
A7A8J6
A7A8J7
A7A8J10
A8A1A1P5 A7A8J11
Part Number
E4402-60023
224 Chapter 5
Figure 5-22
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Microwave RF Assembly Rear View, Flexible Coaxial Cables E4404B,
E4405B, E4407B and E4408B
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 225
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-26
Item
1
Reference
Designator
W10
2 W11
Description
600 MHz 2 nd
LO Drive Cable,
Flexible Coax
2 nd
Converter 321.4 MHz IF Output
Cable, Flexible Coax
From
A8A1A1P1
A8A2J2
To
A8A2J4
Part
Number
AiA1A1P2
226 Chapter 5
Figure 5-23 Microwave RF Assembly Ribbon Cables
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 227
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-27
Item
1
Reference
Designator
W4
2
3
W5
W16
Description
RF Power and Control Cable,
Ribbon
From
A7J4
Attenuator and 2 nd
Converter
Power and Control Cable, Ribbon
(E4407B, E4408B - except Option
UKB)
Attenuator and 2 nd
Converter
Power and Control Cable, Ribbon
(E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B
Option UKB)
RYTHM/LOIS Power and Control
Cable, Ribbon
A8A1A1J2
A8A1A1J2
A7A4J2
To
Part Number
A8A1A1P6 and
A8A1A2J1
A8A5J3 and
A8A2J6
A8A5J3 and
A8A2J6
A8A4J8 and
A8A6J5
228 Chapter 5
Figure 5-24 Power Supply Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 229
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-28
Item
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
Reference
Designator
A5B1
A5MP1-4
A5F1
A5F2
Description
Fan
Screw - M3 X 8 mm
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Rubber grommet
Metal bushing
Plastic rivet
Fuse (dc) 20 A, 32 V
Fuse (dc Line) 5 A, 250 V
Part Number
0515-0372
0400-0713
0380-0006
230 Chapter 5
Figure 5-25 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-29
Item
1
provides a description, and a part number for the items called out in
Description
Screw - M3 X 8 mm
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Part Number
0515-0372
Chapter 5 231
Figure 5-26
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Hardware
Table 5-30
Item
1
Table 5-30 provides a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Description
Screw - M3 X 8 mm
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Part Number
0515-0372
232 Chapter 5
Figure 5-27 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly with Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 233
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Table 5-31
Item
Reference
Designator
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
4
5
11
12
13
A2MP4
A2W2
A2A1
A2MP7
A2A2
A2MP9
A2J1
A2A3
A2MP1
A2W1
Description
Screw - M3 X 12 mm, waxed
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Screw - M3 X 8 mm
(TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
Screw - M2.5 X 8 mm
(TORX Flat Head)
1.5 GHz TG Center Shield, (Option 1DN/1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG Cable Assembly (internal Coaxial)
(Option 1DN/1DQ) (from A2A1J3 to A2A2J2)
1.5 GHz TG Control Board Kit, (Option 1DN/1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG Control Shield, (Option 1DN/1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG RF Board (50
) Kit, (Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz TG RF Board (75
) Kit, (Option 1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG RF Shield, (Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz TG RF Output Type-N Connector Kit, (50
)
(Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz TG RF Output BNC Connector Kit, (75
)
(Option 1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG Output Board (50
) Kit, (Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz TG Output Board (75
) Kit, (Option 1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG RF Output Gasket (50
) (Option 1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG RF Output Gasket (75
) (Option 1DQ)
1.5 GHz TG Cable Assembly (internal Ribbon)
(Option 1DN/1DQ) (from A2A1J2 to A2A2J1)
Part Number
0515-2993
0515-0372
0515-2487
E4401-60131
234 Chapter 5
Figure 5-28 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly with Hardware
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Chapter 5 235
10
11
7
8
9
12
Table 5-32
Item
1
Reference
Designator
A2A1
4
6
A2MP3
A2MP2
A2A2
A2J1
A2A3
A2MP5
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
Description
3.0 GHz TG Driver Board Assembly with shields,
(Option 1DN)
Item 3 - 3.0 GHz TG Driver Board, (Option 1DN)
Item 2 - 3.0 GHz TG Cover Shield, (Option 1DN)
Item 5 - 3.0 GHz TG Support Shield, (Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz BITG Microcircuit Assembly, (Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz TG RF Output Type-N Connector Kit (Option 1DN)
Connector
O-Ring
Sleeve
Washer
Nut
3.0 GHz TG Output Attenuator, (Option 1DN)
TG Attenuator Bracket, (Option 1DN)
Screw - M3 X 8 mm (TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
(2 required)
Screw - M2-56 X 0.188 (TORX Flat Head)
(4 required)
Screw - M3 X 14 mm (TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
(16 required)
Screw - M3 X 10 mm (TORX Pan Head with Crest Washer)
(3 required)
Part Number
0515-0372
0520-0314
0515-2994
0515-2134
236 Chapter 5
Figure 5-29 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly with Cables
Parts List
Replaceable Parts
provides a schematic reference designation, a description, and a part number for the items called out in
.
Table 5-33
Item
1
Reference
Designator
A2W3
2
3
4
5
6
A2W2
A2W1
W12
W13
A2W4
Description
From
3.0 GHz TG RF Output Semi-rigid
Cable, (Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz TG LO Drive Semi-rigid
Cable, (Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz TG Power & Control Wire
Harness, (Option 1DN)
600 MHz TG Drive Flexible Coax,
(Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz TG 1 st
LO Drive Braided Coax
Cable, (Option 1DN) (E4402B, E4403B)
3.0 GHz TG 1 st
LO Drive Braided Coax
Cable, (Option 1DN) (E4404B, E4405B,
E4407B, E4408B)
3.0 GHz TG Attenuator RF Output
Semi-rigid Cable, (Option 1DN)
A2A2J2
A2A1J2
A2A1P1
A8A1A1P3
A8A1A2J5
A8A4J3
A2A3J2
To
A2A3J1
A2A2J4
A2A2J1
A2A2J5
A2A1J3
A2A1J3
A2J1
Part Number
Chapter 5 237
Parts List
Component-Level Information Packets
Component-Level Information Packets
Component-level information is available for selected instrument assemblies. The information for each repairable assembly is provided in the form of a
Component-Level Information Packets (CLIPs).
A CLIP consists of a parts list, component-location diagram, and schematic diagram relating to a unique instrument assembly. An Agilent part number is assigned to each CLIP. When an assembly number changes, a new CLIP is generated.
Ordering CLIPs
For ordering convenience, current CLIPs for a specific instrument are combined into component-level information binders. The current set of CLIPs contains information supporting the instrument assemblies manufactured at the time the manuals was printed, plus a packet containing general CLIP information.
A complete set of CLIPs can be ordered by ordering the CLIP set Option 0BV part number: E4401-90310.
Updated or replacement CLIPs may be ordered through your local Agilent
Technologies Sales or Service office using the CLIP part number provided in Table
238 Chapter 5
Parts List
Component-Level Information Packets
Table 5-34
Reference
Designator
ESA Series Spectrum Analyzer Board Assembly, Serial Number, and CLIP
Number Cross-Reference
Assembly Description
Board
Assembly Part
Number
Serial Number
E4401-60234
E4401-60095
CLIP
Part Number
E4401-90163
E4401-90120
A1A1
A2A1
A2A2
Front panel interface
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Control
(Option 1DN)
3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Control
(Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator RF
(50 Ohm) (Option 1DN)
A2A3
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator RF
(75 Ohm) (Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Output
(50 Ohm) (Option 1DN)
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Output
(75 Ohm) (Option 1DN)
A3 21.4 MHz IF with shields
A4 Processor
A6 Speaker/Floppy
E4403-60004
E4401-60004
E4402-60004
E4401-60005
E4402-60005
E4403-90003
E4401-90031
E4402-90003
E4401-90033
E4402-90001
A7A1
Motherboard (ESA-E Series)
IF Video Sweep Ports, (Option A4J)
A7A5 Fast (Option AYX)
A8
A8A1A1
1.5 GHz RF (50 ohm)
1.5 GHz RF (75 ohm)
3.0 GHz Reference/ Third Converter
(50 ohm) (Top Board)
3.0 GHz Reference/ Third Converter with precision frequency reference
(50 ohm) (Top Board)
E4401-60183
E4401-60059
E4401-60008
E4411-60013
E4401-60107
E4401-60096
E4401-60013
E4401-60014
E4404-60001
E4401-60083
E4401-60082
E4401-60203
E4403-60001
E4403-60053 a
E4401-90164
E4401-90122
E4401-90021
E4411-90057
E4401-90119
E4401-90125
E4401-90025
E4401-90026
E4401-90001
E4401-90123
E4401-90124
E4401-90216
E4401-90127
E4403-90004
E4403-90006
Chapter 5 239
Parts List
Component-Level Information Packets
Table 5-34 ESA Series Spectrum Analyzer Board Assembly, Serial Number, and CLIP
Number Cross-Reference (Continued)
Reference
Designator
Assembly Description
Board
Assembly Part
Number
Serial Number
CLIP
Part Number
A8A1A2
A7A7
3.0 GHz Front End/LO (Bottom Board)
Digital Demod DSP Assembly,
(Option B7D)
E4403-60033
E4401-60088
E4403-90008
E4401-90213
A7A8 Digital Demod RF Assembly,
(Option B7E)
E4402-60087 E4401-90214 a. Denotes refurbished board assemblies are available. Refurbished board assembly part numbers have 9 as the second digit of the suffix. For example, E4401-69119 is the refurbished part number for board assembly E4401-60119.
240 Chapter 5
Parts List
Contacting Agilent Technologies
Contacting Agilent Technologies
For assistance, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service
Office. To find your local Agilent office access the following URL, or if in the
United States, call the following telephone number: http://www.agilent.com/find/assist
1-800-829-4444 (8 am - 8 pm ET, Monday - Friday)
In any correspondence or telephone conversations, refer to your analyzer by its product number, full serial number, and firmware revision.
Chapter 5 241
NOTE
NOTE
Parts List
How to Return Your Analyzer for Service
How to Return Your Analyzer for Service
Service Tag
If you are returning your analyzer to Agilent Technologies, Inc. for servicing, fill in and attach a blue service tag. Several service tags are supplied at the rear of this chapter. Please be as specific as possible about the nature of the problem. If you have recorded any error messages that appeared on the display, or have completed a Performance Test Record, or have any other specific data on the performance of your analyzer, please send a copy of this information with your analyzer.
Original Packaging
Before shipping, pack the unit in the original factory packaging materials if they are available. If the original materials were not retained, see
“Other Packaging” on page 244 .
Ensure that the instrument handle is in the rear-facing position in order to reduce the possibility of damage during shipping. Refer to the following illustration.
Install the transportation disk into the floppy drive to reduce the possibility of damage during shipping. If the original transportation disk is not available, a blank floppy may be substituted.
242 Chapter 5
Parts List
How to Return Your Analyzer for Service
Chapter 5 243
CAUTION
Parts List
How to Return Your Analyzer for Service
Other Packaging
Analyzer damage can result from using packaging materials other than those specified. Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging materials. They do not adequately cushion the equipment or prevent it from shifting in the carton.
They cause equipment damage by generating static electricity and by lodging in the analyzer louvers, blocking airflow.
You can repackage the instrument with commercially available materials, as follows:
1. Attach a completed service tag to the instrument.
2. Install the transportation disk or a blank floppy disk into the disk drive.
3. If you have a front-panel cover, install it on the instrument. If you do not have a front panel cover, make sure the instrument handle is in the forward-facing position to protect the control panel.
4. Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
5. Use a strong shipping container. A double-walled, corrugated cardboard carton with 159 kg (350 lb) bursting strength is adequate. The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the analyzer. Allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the analyzer for packing material.
6. Surround the equipment with three to four inches of packing material to prevent the equipment from moving in the carton. If packing foam is not available, the best alternative is S.D.-240 Air Cap™ from Sealed Air
Corporation (Hayward, California, 94545). Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet filled with 1-1/4 inch air bubbles. Use the pink-colored Air Cap to reduce static electricity. Wrapping the equipment several times in this material should both protect the equipment and prevent it from moving in the carton.
7. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape.
8. Mark the shipping container “FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE” to assure careful handling.
9. Retain copies of all shipping papers.
244 Chapter 5
6
Replacing Assemblies
Chapter 6 245
Replacing Assemblies
What You Will Find in This Chapter
What You Will Find in This Chapter
The procedures in this chapter describe the location, removal and replacement of major assemblies in the spectrum analyzer. Refer to
part numbers, assembly descriptions, and ordering information.
Numbers in parentheses, for example (1), indicate numerical callouts on the figures.
246 Chapter 6
WARNING
WARNING
Figure 6-1
Replacing Assemblies
Before You Start
Before You Start
Before starting to disassemble the analyzer: o Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the analyzer, and read the general safety considerations and the safety note definitions given in the front of this guide. o The spectrum analyzer contains static sensitive components. Read the section entitled
“ESD Information” in Chapter 1 .
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage sources while it is being opened.
The spectrum analyzer contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the safety symbols on the spectrum analyzer and the general safety considerations at the beginning of this service guide before operating the unit with the cover removed. Failure to heed the safety precautions can result in severe or fatal injury.
Service tools you will need
TORX Tool
Table 6-1
Description
TORX Hand Driver - Size T8
TORX Hand Driver - Size T10
TORX Hand Driver - Size T15
Agilent
Part Number
8710-1614
8710-1623
8710-1622
Chapter 6 247
Replacing Assemblies
Before You Start
After a spectrum analyzer repair
If one or more analyzer assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the related adjustments and performance verification tests. Refer to
330 for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for
each assembly.
The adjustments and performance verification tests are done using the
Performance Verification and Adjustment Software. The software can be purchased
through your local Agilent Technologies sales and service office. (Refer to Chapter
8, “Performance Verification and Adjustment Software,” on page 333.)
248 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
Removal and Replacement Procedures in This Chapter
Removal and Replacement Procedures in This Chapter
This chapter describes the removal and replacement procedures for the following
Agilent ESA series spectrum analyzer major assemblies:
“Instrument Outer Case” on page 250
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
“Front Frame Subassemblies” on page 262
, which includes:
“A1A1 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265
“Keypad/Flex Circuit” on page 267
“Lens/Keypad Assembly” on page 268
“Display Backlight” on page 269
“Media Door/Bezel” on page 270
“A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly” on page 274
, which includes:
“Tracking Generator Boards” on page 275
“1.5 GHz Tracking Generator RF Output Connector” on page 278
“A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly” on page 279
“A4 Processor Assembly” on page 283
“A4A1 and A4A2 Flash and DRAM SIMM” on page 285
“A6 Floppy Drive and Speaker Assembly” on page 291
“A7 Motherboard Assembly” on page 293
“Card Cage Assemblies” on page 296
, which includes:
“FM Demod, SIO, GPIB, RS-232, Noise Source Driver” on page 296
“Digital Demod Assemblies Replacement” on page 298
“A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly” on page 304
“A8 3.0 GHz RF Assembly” on page 307
“RF Subassemblies” on page 311 , which includes:
“A8A1 OCXO Precision Frequency Reference” on page 311
“A8A4 LO Amp/IF Switch Assembly” on page 312
“A8A5 Input Attenuator” on page 313
“A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer” on page 315
“A8A2 Second Converter” on page 317
“RF Input Connector” on page 319
“1.5 GHz RF Input Connector” on page 321
Chapter 6 249
Figure 6-2
Replacing Assemblies
Instrument Outer Case
Instrument Outer Case
Outer Case, Rear Frame Removal
250 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
Instrument Outer Case
Removal
disconnect the spectrum analyzer from ac power (1).
2. Remove any adapters or cables (2) connected to the front frame.
3. Carefully place the analyzer on the work surface with the front frame (3) facing down.
4. Position the handle (4) as shown.
5. Remove the four screws (5) that hold the rear frame and outer case in place.
6. Remove the rear frame (6).
7. Pull the outer cover off towards the rear of the analyzer.
Replacement
, disconnect the spectrum analyzer from ac power (1).
2. Remove any adapters or cables (2) connected to the front frame.
3. Carefully place the spectrum analyzer on the work surface with the front frame
(3) facing down.
4. Replace the analyzer outer case, matching the grill (8) on the bottom of the case to the bottom of the analyzer.
5. Fit the leading edge of the case completely into the slot (9) on the back of the front frame assembly.
6. Replace the rear frame assembly (6) using the four screws (5) to fasten the rear frame to the analyzer. Tighten them to 21 inch-pounds.
Chapter 6 251
Figure 6-3
Replacing Assemblies
Chassis Cover
Chassis Cover
Chassis Cover Removal
Removal
1. If you haven’t already done so, remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the removal procedure
“Instrument Outer Case” on page 250 .
2. Lay the analyzer flat as shown in Figure 6-3
.
3. Remove the 17 screws (2) and (3) attaching the chassis cover (1) to the chassis. Note that the number of screws attaching the chassis cover may vary with option mixes.
4. The chassis cover can now be removed from the chassis.
252 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
Chassis Cover
Replacement
1. Position the chassis cover (1) over the analyzer as shown in Figure 6-3
, then lower onto the analyzer.
2. Replace the 17 screws (2) as (3) shown and tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
Chapter 6 253
CAUTION
Figure 6-4
Replacing Assemblies
A1 Front Frame Assembly
A1 Front Frame Assembly
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Extension
The A1 front frame assembly can be extended from the analyzer without detaching any connections.
A1 Front Frame Assembly Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the removal procedure
.
. With the analyzer still on its face, remove the five screws
(1) , two on the bottom side and three on the top of the analyzer, that secure the
254 Chapter 6
Figure 6-5
Replacing Assemblies
A1 Front Frame Assembly front frame to the RF assembly and chassis cover.
3. Place the analyzer with the top side facing up and remove the remaining two screws (2) that secure the front frame subpanel to the chassis.
4. Slide the front frame forward until it catches on the tabs on the sides of the chassis.
Removal
Refer to
Figure 6-4 . To completely remove the A1 front frame assembly, complete
the
procedure, then continue with the following steps:
Front Frame Ribbon Cable
1. Refer to
Figure 6-5 . Disconnect the ribbon cable (1) from the A1A1 front
panel interface board.
2. Carefully pull the sides of the front frame subpanel away from the chassis and over the tabs on the chassis.
3. Slide the front frame forward to disengage from the chassis assembly.
Chapter 6 255
NOTE
Replacing Assemblies
A1 Front Frame Assembly
Replacement
1. Align the A1 front frame subpanel rails with the chassis as shown in
.
. Connect the ribbon cable (1) to the front frame assembly.
3. Carefully slide the front frame toward the chassis, assuring the ribbon cable is not pinched between assemblies, and the RF input connector lines up correctly with the opening in the front frame.
Make sure the water seal is still in place around the input connector (and around the A2 tracking generator connector if the analyzer is an Option 1DN or 1DQ) before reinstalling the front frame assembly.
. Replace the screws (1) that secure the front frame to the chassis. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
5. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure for the
.
6. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
256 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
Nameplate
Figure 6-6
Nameplate
Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the existing nameplate (1) as shown in
2. Clean the surface (2) of any adhesive residue.
3. Peel the backing (3) off the new nameplate.
4. Place the new nameplate (4) as shown.
Nameplate Replacement
Chapter 6 257
CAUTION
TIP
Replacing Assemblies
Connector Label
Connector Label
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the removal procedure
.
2. Remove the front frame assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
3. Remove the volume and RPG knobs. Refer to the removal procedure
Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265 .
It is possible to perform this procedure without completely removing the front panel interface board. You can remove the knobs (1), the two lower screws (2), and loosen the two top screws (3) 2 turns, just so the knob shafts clear the front panel as shown in
4. If the analyzer does not have a tracking generator, remove the hole plug for the
RF OUT connector.
5. Remove the two connector covers from the front panel by pinching them from the sides (4) and removing them through the front of the front frame assembly.
6. Peel off the old connector label (1) loosening any residual adhesive with a sharp
knife or razor blade as you go. See Figure 6-8 .
258 Chapter 6
Figure 6-7 Connector Covers
Replacing Assemblies
Connector Label
Chapter 6 259
Figure 6-8
Replacing Assemblies
Connector Label
Installation
Before installing the new connector label, make sure the surface is free from any adhesive residue left over from the old label. Failure to do so may result in an uneven (lumpy) appearance of the new label.
1. Peel the backing (2) off the new label as show in
2. Align and install the label by placing a finger in the RF OUT and VOLUME holes. Observe the alignment of the INPUT and PROBE POWER holes (3).
Connector Label Removal and Installation
260 Chapter 6
TIP
Replacing Assemblies
Connector Label
It may be helpful to trim off about 2 mm of the tabs (5) on the connector covers prior to reinstalling them. This will help in aligning the covers. See
3. Reinstall the two connector covers from the front panel by pinching them from
the sides (4) and installing them through the front of the assembly. See Figure
4. Align the connector covers so they open downward as shown.
Replacement
1. Re-install or re-attach the front panel interface board. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1A1 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265
.
2. Inspect the ribbon cables to the front panel interface board to ensure they have not come loose.
3. Replace the RPG and volume knobs. It may be helpful to add a drop of isopropyl alcohol or water to the RPG to make it easier to press on the shaft.
4. Re-install the front frame assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure “A1
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
5. Re-install the instrument outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
“Instrument Outer Case” on page 250 .
Chapter 6 261
CAUTION
Figure 6-9
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
In order to remove any of the following subassemblies, it is necessary to remove the A1 front frame assembly from the main chassis. Refer to the removal procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
After the subassembly is replaced, reconnect the front frame to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure for the
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
Refer to
Table 7-2 in Chapter 7 for the related adjustments and performance
verification tests required for each assembly.
Use ESD precautions when performing the following replacement procedures.
A1A2 Display
A1A2 Display Replacement
262 Chapter 6
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
Removal
for the following procedure.
1. Place the front frame assembly face down on the work surface.
2. Disconnect the two 2-wire backlight cables (1) from the front panel interface inverter board.
3. Disconnect W3 ribbon cable (2) from the front panel interface board.
The W3 display ribbon cable connector (2) is delicate. With a small screwdriver or similar tool, gently push the lock tabs out from the back of the connector.
Excessive force on the locking tab can break the retaining clips, and if broken, board replacement will be necessary.
4. Remove the four screws (3) securing the display (in a bracket) (4) to the front frame.
5. Carefully lift the display out of the front frame assembly.
Replacement
The display monitor comes with a protective plastic sheet over the glass. Remove this plastic very slowly to avoid damage due to ESD.
The surface of the display is very easily scratched. Avoid touching it with your bare hands or other objects. Use a blower to remove any dust from the display surface.
1. Clean the inside of the lens that is attached to the front frame.
2. Refer to
Figure 6-10 . Place the display (3) into the front frame assembly.
Make sure that the cables are not pinched between the display and the front frame, and the W3 ribbon cable is not folded.
3. Replace the four screws (17) that secure the display bracket to the front frame.
Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Connect the W3 display ribbon cable (2) to the front panel interface board.
Chapter 6 263
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
TIP
NOTE
Figure 6-10
An easy way to insert this delicate cable into the connector is to place your finger on the cable, in the center of the LCD display, and gently slide the cable toward the connector until they align. Then, providing guidance with the other hand as necessary, slide the cable until the end slips into the connector.
Ensure the cable end is seated completely and is aligned straight within the connector body.
Continue to hold the cable in place with your finger, and with the other hand gently
press the locking tabs (5) into place. See Figure 6-9
.
If you experience display problems, check this connection.
5. Connect the two backlight cables (1) to the front panel interface inverter board.
Front Frame Assembly Parts
264 Chapter 6
Figure 6-11
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
A1A1 Front Panel Interface Board
Removal
1. Refer to
Figure 6-11 . Remove the media door(1) from the front panel.
2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver under the RPG knob(2) as shown in
, and twist it to remove the knob.
Removing the Knobs
3. Grasp the volume knob(3) and pull it off.
4. Refer to
Figure 6-9 . Disconnect the two 2-wire backlight cables (1) from the
inverter board.
5. Disconnect the display ribbon cable (2) and the keypad ribbon cable from the front panel interface board.
Chapter 6 265
CAUTION
NOTE
TIP
NOTE
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
The display ribbon cable connector (2) is delicate. Refer to
small screwdriver or similar tool, gently push the lock tabs (6) out from the back of the connector. Excessive force on the locking tab will break the retaining clips, and if broken, board replacement will be necessary.
6. Refer to
Figure 6-10 . Remove the four screws that secure the A1A1 front panel
interface board (13) to the front frame.
7. Remove the front panel interface board from the front frame assembly.
There is a water-seal gasket placed around the volume control shaft that will need to be repositioned during the replacement procedure.
Replacement
1. Place the front panel interface board (13) in the correct position in the front frame assembly. Make sure the water seal is in place around the volume shaft.
2. Replace the four screws that secure the board to the front frame. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Connect the W3 display ribbon cable (2) to the front panel interface board.
An easy way to insert this delicate cable into the connector is to place your finger on the cable, in the center of the LCD display, and gently slide the cable toward the connector until they align. Then, providing guidance with the other hand as necessary, slide the cable until the end slips into the connector.
Ensure the cable end is seated completely and is aligned straight within the connector body.
Continue to hold the cable in place with your finger, and with the other hand gently press the locking tabs (5) into place.
See
.
If you experience display problems, check this connection.
4. Reconnect the two 2-wire backlight cables (1) to the inverter board, making sure that the cables are dressed away from the openings for the control knobs.
5. Press the volume and RPG knobs onto their control shafts.
Front Panel RPG
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the front panel interface board. Refer to the removal procedure “A1A1
Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265 .
2. Unsolder the appropriate RPG and remove it from the front panel interface board.
266 Chapter 6
TIP
NOTE
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
3. Place the new RPG in the correct position and resolder the leads.
4. Replace the front panel interface board. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1A1 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265
.
Keypad/Flex Circuit
Removal
1. Remove the RPG knobs.
To facilitate knob removal, slide any flat flexible material (such as a folded business card) under the knob and pry upward.
2. Remove the front panel interface board. Refer to the removal procedure
Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265
.
3. Refer to
. Remove the four screws (1) that secure the display to the front frame.
4. Remove the display assembly (2) then the support bracket (3).
5. Remove the 6 screws (8) securing the subpanel assembly (9) to the front frame
(6) .
6. Remove the subpanel assembly (9).
7. Lift out the keypad/flex circuit (4) and the main keypad (7). Be careful to avoid touching the keypad contacts with your fingers.
Replacement
1. Refer to
Figure 6-10 . Place the main keypad (7) so it lays flat in the front
frame (6). Be careful to avoid touching the keypad contacts with your fingers.
2. Lay in the flex circuit (4) so it aligns with the pegs on the front frame and lays flat. A small amount of circuit ripple will be unavoidable.
3. Replace the subpanel (9), and secure with the six screws (8). Tighten them to
9 inch-pounds.
If you are putting in a new flex circuit, it will need to be preformed in order to fit properly in the front frame. Slightly bend the circuit along the slits in two places between the main key section and the display section to conform to the contours of the front frame. Be careful to not bend the circuit too much (no more than a 90° angle), and do not crease it. This can damage the traces in the flex circuit.
4. Replace the support bracket (3), along with the display (2) and secure with the four screws (1). Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
5. Replace the front panel interface board. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1A1 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265
.
6. Replace the RPG knobs.
Chapter 6 267
NOTE
Figure 6-12
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
Lens/Keypad Assembly
Removal
The lens/keypad assembly is pressed into place, using a strong adhesive instead of hardware. It is made of a plastic material and will bend but not break.
1. Remove the keypad/flex circuit. Refer to the removal procedure “Keypad/Flex
.
2. To remove the lens/keypad from the front frame, apply pressure from the front side. Using both thumbs, press in the corner of the lens as shown in
until it pops out.
Lens Removal
Replacement
1. Remove the paper covering the adhesive on the lens/keypad assembly.
2. Carefully fit the new lens/keypad assembly into place in the front frame. Press along the edges of the lens from the inside to adhere it to the front frame.
3. Make sure the inside of the lens is clean from contaminants such as lint and fingerprints before proceeding.
4. Replace the main keypad, flex circuit, and subpanel assembly (with the display
268 Chapter 6
Figure 6-13
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies and front panel interface board attached). Refer to the replacement procedure
“Keypad/Flex Circuit” on page 267
.
5. Replace the front panel interface board. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1A1 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 265
.
6. After the front frame is reattached to the chassis, remove the protective plastic covering from the lens.
Display Backlight
Removal
1. Remove the display. Refer to the removal procedure
2. Refer to
Figure 6-13 . Locate the two 2-wire connectors on the display. These
are the backlight assemblies (1). Carefully press on the opposite end from the wires to slide a backlight assembly partially out of the display (2). Once the end of a backlight casing is exposed, you can pull it straight out from the display.
Display Backlight Replacement
NOTE
Replacement
Do not touch the bulb encased in the plastic backlight assembly.
1. Insert the new backlight assembly (1) by sliding it into the display, non-wired end first, taking care not to force it. It is keyed so it will only fit properly one way. Slide it all the way in to the end of the casing.
Chapter 6 269
NOTE
Figure 6-14
Replacing Assemblies
Front Frame Subassemblies
It is recommended that both backlights be replaced at the same time, even though only one has failed. The remaining (functioning) backlight will likely fail shortly after the first backlight fails.
2. Replace the display. Refer to the replacement procedure “A1A2 Display” on page 262
.
Media Door/Bezel
1. The media door snaps on and off of the media bezel.
. To remove the media bezel (1), it is necessary to remove the front frame. Refer to the removal procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
3. The bezel also snaps into place. It can be removed by pressing the tabs together from the inside and pushing the bezel out of the front frame.
Media Door/Bezel
270 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
Vibration Support Bar
CAUTION
Figure 6-15
Vibration Support Bar
Removal
1. Referring to
, loosen, but do not remove, all nine of the screws (1) securing the boards and blank panels at the rear of the chassis.
The vibration support bar is fragile. Use caution to avoid breakage when removing it.
2. On the vibration support bar, press in the locking tabs (2) and rotate the bar
(3) upward. Remove the bar by sliding it out of the holes in each of the assemblies and lifting it up.
Removing the Vibration Support Bar
Replacing the Vibration Support Bar
1. Referring to Figure 6-16 , replace the vibration support bar (1) as follows:
a. Position the vibration support bar (1) as shown and insert the hook (2) into the A3 IF assembly’s support arm.
b. Engage each hook (3) of the other assemblies or blank panels.
c. After you position each of the assemblies or blank panels, rotate (4) the support bar to lock them in place.
d. Referring to
Figure 6-17 , make sure that the tab (1) is positioned in the slot
of the power supply chassis and the vibration bar is fully seated and locked
(2) into position.
Chapter 6 271
Replacing Assemblies
Vibration Support Bar
CAUTION
Figure 6-16
The vibration support bar can easily be broken if it is forced. Install it with care.
. Tighten all the screws that were loosened in the removal procedure to 9 inch-pounds.
Installing the Vibration Support Bar
272 Chapter 6
Figure 6-17 Seating the Vibration Support Bar
Replacing Assemblies
Vibration Support Bar
Chapter 6 273
Replacing Assemblies
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
CAUTION
Figure 6-18
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
(E4401B and E4411B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure
.
2. Extend the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the extension procedure
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
3. Remove the water seal from around the front of the tracking generator connector.
4. Refer to Figure 6-18 . Remove the four screws (1), (three from the side and one
from the back), securing the tracking generator assembly to the chassis.
5. Carefully pull up on the tracking generator assembly to remove it from the motherboard connector.
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Hardware
Replacement
1. Carefully plug the tracking generator assembly into the motherboard.
274 Chapter 6
CAUTION
Figure 6-19
Replacing Assemblies
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
2. Refer to
Figure 6-18 . Replace the four screws (1) that secure the tracking
generator to the chassis. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the water seal around the front of the tracking generator connector.
4. Reconnect the A1 front frame to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
5. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
6. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
7. Refer to
Table 7-2 in Chapter 7 for the related adjustments and performance
verification tests required for each assembly.
Tracking Generator Boards
The removal and replacement of any of the three boards (RF board, control board, and output board) that make up the 1.5 GHz tracking generator assembly (T.G.) requires that the T.G. first be removed from the analyzer. Refer to the removal and replacement procedures
“A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly” on page 274
.
After any board removal, refer to Table 7-2 in Chapter 7 for the related adjustments
and performance verification tests required. For the following procedures, refer to
Use ESD precautions when performing the following replacement procedures.
Tracking Generator Board Replacement
Chapter 6 275
Replacing Assemblies
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
Tracking Generator RF Board Removal
Removal
1. Remove the 20 screws (1) that secure the RF shield (9) to the center shield
(4) .
2. Unplug the output board wire harness (14) from the RF board (8).
3. Carefully lift the RF board (8) straight away from the center shield to disconnect the connector on the output board (11).
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable (13) from the RF board.
5. Disconnect the coaxial cable (5) from the RF board.
Replacement
1. Plug in the ribbon cable (13) and the coaxial cable (5) into the RF board
(8) .
2. Carefully position the RF board onto the center shield, ensuring no cables will be pinched between the shields. Press down to engage the connectors at the output board.
3. Plug the output board wire harness (14) into the RF board.
4. Replace the RF shield (9) with the 20 screws removed earlier. Tighten them to
13.5 inch-pounds.
Tracking Generator Control Board Removal
Removal
1. Remove the 17 screws(1) that secure the control shield (7) to the center shield (4).
2. Unplug the ribbon cable (13) from the control board (6).
3. Unplug the coaxial cable (5) from the control board.
Replacement
1. Plug in the ribbon (13) and the coaxial cable (5) into the control board (6).
2. Position the control board onto the center shield (4), ensuring no cables will be pinched between the shields.
3. Replace the control shield (7) with the 17 screws removed earlier. Tighten them to 13.5 inch-pounds.
276 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
Tracking Generator Output Board Removal
Removal
1. Remove the 20 screws (1) that secure the RF shield (9) to the center shield
(4) .
2. Remove the 17 screws (1) that secure the control shield (7) to the center shield (4).
3. Unsolder the RF output connector (10).
4. Unplug the wire harness (14) from the RF board (8).
5. Carefully lift the RF board (8) straight away from the center shield to disconnect the connector on the output board (11).
6. Remove the 4 screws (2) that secure the output board (11) to the center shield (4).
7. Lift the output board from the center shield.
Replacement
1. Place the output board (11) into the center shield (4).
2. Carefully position the RF board (8) onto the center shield, ensuring no cables will be pinched between the shields. Press down to engage the connectors at the output board.
3. Replace the 4 screws securing the output board that were removed earlier.
Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Plug the wire harness (14) into the RF board.
5. Resolder the RF output connector (10) to the output board.
6. Replace the RF and control shields. Tighten all of the screws to 13.5 inch-pounds.
Chapter 6 277
Replacing Assemblies
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
1.5 GHz Tracking Generator RF Output Connector
Removal
1. Remove the 17 screws (1) that secure the control shield to the center shield.
2. Remove the water seal (12)from around the RF output connector (10).
3. Remove the 4 screws (3) securing the connector to the center shield (4).
4. Heat the connector center contact on the output board and pull the connector out gently.
Replacement
1. Remove excess solder from the output board pad.
2. Fasten the new input connector to the center shield with the four screws (3) tightened to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Resolder the center conductor to the output board.
4. Replace the water seal (12) around the RF output connector.
5. Replace the 17 screws that secure the control shield to the center shield.
Tighten them to 13.5 inch-pounds.
278 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
CAUTION
Figure 6-20
A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Extend the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the extension procedure “A1
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
3. Refer to
. Disconnect the SMB cable (1) and the SMA cable (2) from the tracking generator assembly.
4. Refer to Figure 6-21 . Remove the five screws (1), (four from the side and one
from the back), securing the A2 tracking generator assembly (2) to the chassis.
5. Carefully pull up on the tracking generator assembly to remove it from the motherboard connector.
A2 Tracking Generator Cables (E4404B, E4405B, E4407, and E4408B)
Chapter 6 279
Figure 6-21
Replacing Assemblies
A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly
A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Hardware
Replacement
. Carefully plug the tracking generator assembly (2) into the motherboard.
. Replace the five screws (1) that secure the tracking generator to the chassis. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Refer to Figure 6-20 . Reconnect the SMB cable (1) and the SMA cable (2) to
the tracking generator assembly. Tighten the SMA connector to 10 inch-pounds.
4. Replace the water seal around the front of the tracking generator connector.
5. Reconnect the A1 front frame to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
6. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure “Chassis Cover” on page 252 .
7. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
8. Refer to Table 7-2 in Chapter 7
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
280 Chapter 6
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
A3 IF Assembly
A3 IF Assembly
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Remove the vibration support bar. Refer to the removal procedure
.
3. Refer to
Figure 6-22 . Remove the two screws (1) securing the A3 IF assembly
to the chassis.
4. Disconnect the W2 (2) coaxial cable from the IF assembly.
5. Carefully lift the IF assembly to remove it from the motherboard connector.
Chapter 6 281
Figure 6-22
Replacing Assemblies
A3 IF Assembly
A3 IF Assembly
Replacement
1. Carefully plug the IF assembly into the motherboard.
. Replace the two screws (1) that secure the IF assembly to the chassis. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Connect the W2 (2) coaxial cable to the IF assembly.
4. Replace the vibration support bar. Refer to the replacement procedure
“Vibration Support Bar” on page 271
.
5. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure “Chassis Cover” on page 252 .
6. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
7. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
282 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A4 Processor Assembly
CAUTION
Figure 6-23
A4 Processor Assembly
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Remove the vibration support bar. Refer to the removal procedure
.
3. Refer to
. Remove the single screw (1) securing the A4 processor assembly to the chassis.
4. Disconnect the front panel ribbon cable (2) from the processor assembly.
5. Carefully lift the processor assembly to remove it from the motherboard connector.
A4 Processor Assembly
Chapter 6 283
Replacing Assemblies
A4 Processor Assembly
Replacement
1. Carefully plug the processor assembly into the motherboard.
. Replace the single screw (1) that secures the processor assembly to the chassis, but do not tighten it yet.
3. Reconnect the front panel ribbon cable (2) to the processor assembly.
4. Replace the vibration support bar. Refer to the replacement procedure
“Vibration Support Bar” on page 271
.
5. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure “Chassis Cover” on page 252 .
6. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
7. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
284 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A4A1 and A4A2 Flash and DRAM SIMM
A4A1 and A4A2 Flash and DRAM SIMM
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. CAUTION
Figure 6-24
Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the A4 processor assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Processor Assembly” on page 283
.
2. Refer to
Figure 6-24 . Carefully remove the flash SIMM (1) or the DRAM
SIMM (2).
3. Replace the flash SIMM (1) or the DRAM SIMM (2).
4. Replace the A4 processor assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
Processor Assembly” on page 283
.
5. Refer to
Table 7-2 on page 330 for the related adjustments and performance
verification tests required for each assembly.
Flash SIMM and DRAM SIMM
Chapter 6 285
Replacing Assemblies
A4MAU58 Battery
CAUTION
WARNING
A4MAU58 Battery
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended. Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s instruction.
DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT
COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE.
Figure 6-25 sk780a
Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the A4 processor assembly from the analyzer. Refer to the removal procedure
“A4 Processor Assembly” on page 283 .
. Gently pry the A4MAU58 lithium battery from the processor board.
3. Insert the new battery, ensuring proper polarity as indicated on the socket.
4. Replace the processor assembly in the analyzer. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A4 Processor Assembly” on page 283 .
5. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
Processor Battery Location
286 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A5 Power Supply
CAUTION
Figure 6-26
A5 Power Supply
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Remove the vibration support bar. Refer to the removal procedure
.
3. Extend the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the extension procedure “A1
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
4. Refer to
. Remove the single screw (4) securing the A5 power supply assembly (5) to the chassis at the rear of the analyzer.
5. Carefully pull up on the power supply assembly to remove it from motherboard connector.
A5 Power Supply
Chapter 6 287
Replacing Assemblies
A5 Power Supply
Replacement
1. Carefully plug the A5 power supply assembly into the motherboard.
. Replace the single screw (4) that secures the power supply (5) to the chassis, but do not tighten it yet.
3. Reconnect the front frame assembly to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
4. Replace the vibration support bar. Refer to the replacement procedure
“Vibration Support Bar” on page 271
.
5. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure “Chassis Cover” on page 252 .
6. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
7. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
288 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A5B1 Fan
A5B1 Fan
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. CAUTION
Figure 6-27
Removal
1. Remove the power supply assembly. Refer to the removal procedure “A5 Power
2. Unplug the fan wires (2) from the power supply board connector (3) inside the assembly. Refer to
3. Refer to
Figure 6-27 . Remove the four screws (1) securing the top cover to the
power supply assembly.
Power Supply Cover Removal
Chapter 6 289
Replacing Assemblies
A5B1 Fan
4. Remove the top cover.
5. Locate the four plastic rivets (5) that secure the fan (6) to the cover.
6. The rivets are not reusable and need to be cut off in order to change the fan.
7. The fan can be removed after the four rivets are cut out.
Replacement
1. Position the fan on the outside of the power supply cover so that the fan wires go through the opening of the cover and are aligned with the notch. Be careful to install the fan so that the arrow indicating the direction of the air flow, (on the body of the fan), is pointing away from the cover. This will ensure the proper air flow through the analyzer and exiting through the side panel. Be careful not to pinch the fan wires against the cover.
. Assemble the bushing, grommet, and rivet as shown in four places.
3. Replace the power supply cover, with fan, on the power supply assembly. Make sure the lip on the top cover catches underneath (4) the bottom cover.
4. Replace the four screws (1) that secure the top cover to the power supply assembly. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
5. Plug the fan connector into the power supply board.
6. Replace the power supply assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
7. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
290 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A6 Floppy Drive and Speaker Assembly
CAUTION
Figure 6-28
A6 Floppy Drive and Speaker Assembly
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Extend the A1 front frame. Refer to the extension procedure “A1 Front Frame
3. Refer to
. Remove the four screws (1) securing the A6 floppy/speaker assembly (2) to the side frame.
4. Carefully pull up on the floppy/speaker assembly to remove it from the motherboard connector.
A6 Speaker Assembly Removal
Chapter 6 291
Replacing Assemblies
A6 Floppy Drive and Speaker Assembly
Replacement
1. Carefully plug the A6 floppy/speaker assembly into the motherboard.
. Replace the four screws (1) that secure the floppy/speaker assembly (2) to the side chassis. Tighten them to
9 inch-pounds.
3. Reconnect the A1 Front Frame to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
4. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure “Chassis Cover” on page 252 .
5. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
6. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
292 Chapter 6
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
A7 Motherboard Assembly
A7 Motherboard Assembly
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the removal procedure “Instrument
2. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
3. Extend the A1 front frame. Refer to the extension procedure “A1 Front Frame
4. Remove the vibration support bar. Refer to the removal procedure
.
5. Remove the A6 floppy/speaker assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Floppy Drive and Speaker Assembly” on page 291
.
6. If the analyzer is an Option 1DN or Option 1DQ, remove the A2 tracking
generator. Refer to the removal procedure “A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator
“A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly” on page 279 .
7. Remove the A3 IF assembly. Refer to the removal procedure “A3 IF Assembly” on page 281
.
8. Remove the A4 processor assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Processor Assembly” on page 283
.
9. Remove the A5 power supply assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
.
10. Remove all installed input/output or optional assemblies from the motherboard.
Refer to the removal procedure “FM Demod, SIO, GPIB, RS-232, Noise
.
Chapter 6 293
Figure 6-29
Replacing Assemblies
A7 Motherboard Assembly
A7 Motherboard Removal
11. Refer to
. Disconnect the RF ribbon cable (1) from the motherboard (2).
12. Remove the three screws (3) as indicated in
.
13. Slide the motherboard sideways to disengage the shoulder lock standoffs (4), and lift the motherboard out of the chassis.
Replacement
. Carefully place the motherboard (2) into the chassis.
2. Slide the motherboard sideways to engage the shoulder locks (4) on the chassis.
3. Replace the three screws (3) that secure the motherboard to the chassis.
Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
. Connect the RF ribbon cable (1) to the motherboard.
5. Replace the A5 power supply assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
6. Replace the A4 processor assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
Processor Assembly” on page 283 .
7. Replace the A3 IF assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure “A3 IF
294 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A7 Motherboard Assembly
8. Replace the A2 tracking generator assembly (Option 1DN) if applicable. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A2 1.5 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly” on page 274 or
“A2 3.0 GHz Tracking Generator Assembly” on page 279
.
9. Replace the A6 speaker assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure “A6
Floppy Drive and Speaker Assembly” on page 291
.
10. Replace the I/O assemblies. Refer to the replacement procedure
SIO, GPIB, RS-232, Noise Source Driver” on page 296 .
11. Reconnect the A1 front frame to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
12. Replace the vibration support bar. Refer to the replacement procedure
“Vibration Support Bar” on page 271 .
13. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
14. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
15. Refer to
Table 7-2 on page 330 for the related adjustments and performance
verification tests required for each assembly.
Chapter 6 295
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
FM Demod, SIO, GPIB, RS-232, Noise Source Driver
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
The following procedure can be used for all of the Card Cage assemblies:
• A7A1 Spectrum Analyzer Input/Output Assembly (Option A4J)
• A7A2 GPIB/Parallel Assembly (Option A4H)
• A7A3 RS-232/Parallel Assembly (Option 1AX)
• A7A4 Frequency Extension Assembly (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, E4408B)
• A7A5 Fast ADC Assembly (Option AYX – available on all
Agilent ESA-E Series spectrum analyzers: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B,
E4405B, and E4407B)
• A7A6 FM Demod Assembly (Option BAA - available on all
Agilent ESA-E series spectrum analyzers: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B,
E4405B, and E4407B)
• A7A10 Bluetooth Demodulator Assembly (Option 106 - available on E4402B,
E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B)
• A7A13 Noise Source Driver Assembly (part of Option 219 - available on all
ESA-E Series spectrum analyzers; E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and
E4407B)
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure
.
2. Remove the vibration support bar. Refer to the removal procedure “Vibration
3. Locate the assembly to be removed.
296 Chapter 6
Figure 6-30 Card Cage Hardware
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
4. Refer to
Figure 6-30 . Loosen, the single screw (1) securing the card cage
assembly to the chassis.
5. Carefully pull up on the assembly to remove it from the motherboard connector.
Replacement
1. Carefully plug the assembly into the motherboard.
2. Refer to
Figure 6-30 . Replace the single screw (1) that secures the card cage
assembly to the chassis, but do not tighten it yet.
3. Replace the vibration support bar. Refer to the replacement procedure
“Vibration Support Bar” on page 271 .
4. Refer to
Figure 6-30 . Tighten the single screw (1) that secures the card cage
assembly to the chassis to 9 inch-pounds.
5. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
6. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
7. Refer to
Table 7-2 on page 330 for the related adjustments and performance
verification tests required for each assembly.
Chapter 6 297
CAUTION
Figure 6-31
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
Digital Demod Assemblies Replacement
Digital Signal Processor Board Removal
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure
.
2. Remove the vibration support bar. Refer to the removal procedure “Vibration
. Loosen, the single screw (1) securing the digital signal processor (DSP) assembly to the chassis.
4. Carefully pull up on the DSP assembly to remove it from the motherboard connector.
5. Unplug the sample rate cable (2) and the DSP out cable (3) from the DSP assembly.
6. Remove the DSP assembly.
Digital Signal Processor Board
298 Chapter 6
CAUTION
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
Digital Signal Processor Board Replacement
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
. Position the digital signal processor (DSP) assembly to be able to connect the cables as shown.
2. Connect the sample rate cable (2) and the DSP out cable (3) to the DSP assembly.
3. Lower the assembly into the card cage being careful not to pinch the cables, and plug it into the motherboard.
4. Replace the single screw (1) securing the DSP assembly to the chassis.
5. Replace the vibration support bar. Refer to the replacement procedure
“Vibration Support Bar” on page 271 .
6. Replace the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
Digital Demod RF Board Removal
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
1. Remove the DSP board. Refer to the procedure
.
2. Refer to
Figure 6-30 . Loosen, the single screw (1) securing the Digital Demod
RF (DDRF) assembly to the chassis.
. Unplug the MMCX cable connectors (2) through (6) from the DDRF board.
Chapter 6 299
Figure 6-32
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
Digital Demod RF Board Cables
300 Chapter 6
Figure 6-33 Digital Demod RF Board Cable Clip
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
4. Refer to
Figure 6-33 . Remove the cables from the cable clip (1).
5. Carefully pull up on the DDRF assembly, to unplug it from the motherboard, remove the DDRF assembly.
6. Refer to
Figure 6-34 . If necessary, unplug the sample rate cable (1) from the
DDRF board and remove the cable from the groves on the shield and the cable clip (2).
Chapter 6 301
CAUTION
Figure 6-34
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
Digital Demod RF Board Replacement
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Digital Demod RF Board Sample Rate Cable Routing
1. Refer to
Figure 6-33 . Ensure that the DDRF cables have been removed from the
cable clip (1).
2. Refer to Figure 6-34 . Connect sample rate cable (3) to the DDRF board at J12.
3. Dress the cable into the groves on the shield, over the top of the board, and secure it in the cable clip (2) as shown.
302 Chapter 6
Figure 6-35 Digital Demod RF Board Option Slot
Replacing Assemblies
Card Cage Assemblies
4. Refer to
Figure 6-35 . Lower the assembly into the card cage being careful not
to pinch the cables and plug it into Option Slot 5 (1) on the motherboard.
5. Refer to
Figure 6-32 . Connect the MMCX cable connectors to the DDRF board
as shown in the illustration.
6. Refer to
. Secure the MMCX cables in the cable clip (1).
7. Refer to
. Replace the single screw (1) securing the DDRF assembly to the chassis.
8. Connect the sample rate cable to the DSP board and replace the DSP board into
Option Slot 4. Refer to the procedure
“Digital Signal Processor Board
.
Chapter 6 303
Replacing Assemblies
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
CAUTION
NOTE
Figure 6-36
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
(E4401B and E4411B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
The RF assembly is not field serviceable. Please do not remove the shields (other than the input connector cover).
Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the removal procedure
.
2. Remove chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure
.
3. Remove the A1 Front Frame assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly Cables
304 Chapter 6
Figure 6-37
Replacing Assemblies
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
4. Refer to
Figure 6-36 . Disconnect the W2 coaxial cable (1) from the A3 IF
assembly.
5. Disconnect the RF ribbon cable (2) from the motherboard at the rear of the analyzer.
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly Removal
6. Refer to
Figure 6-37 . Turn the analyzer upside down and remove the six screws
labeled (1 - 6) that hold the RF assembly to the chassis.
7. Lift the RF assembly from the spectrum analyzer.
Replacement
1. Place the analyzer chassis upside down on the work surface.
2. Position the RF assembly on the chassis, taking care not to pinch any of the cables.
3. Refer to
Figure 6-37 . Replace the six screws labeled (1 - 6) that secure the
RF assembly to the chassis. The correct screw holes are marked 1 through 6 on the assembly. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Refer to
. Connect the ribbon cable (1) to the RF assembly and W2 coaxial cable (2) to the A3 IF assembly.
5. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
Chapter 6 305
Replacing Assemblies
A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly
6. Make sure the water seal is in place on the input connector.
7. Reconnect the A1 front frame to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
8. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
9. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 330
for the related adjustments and performance verification tests required for each assembly.
306 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
A8 3.0 GHz RF Assembly
A8 3.0 GHz RF Assembly
(E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. CAUTION
Figure 6-38
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Remove the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
3.0 GHz RF Assembly Ribbon Cable
3. Referring to Figure 6-38 , disconnect the SMB cable (1) from the IF assembly.
4. Disconnect the RF assembly ribbon cable (2).
Chapter 6 307
Figure 6-39
Replacing Assemblies
A8 3.0 GHz RF Assembly
3.0 GHz RF Assembly Cables
5. Referring to
Figure 6-39 , disconnect the frequency extension ribbon cable (1).
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B only)
6. Gently tuck these two cables away behind the microcircuits (4) of the RF assembly.
7. If the analyzer has a tracking generator, disconnect the cable (3) from the tracking generator connector. Tuck the cable end with the yellow tag away with the other cables as described in the previous step.
308 Chapter 6
Figure 6-40 RF Deck Screws
Replacing Assemblies
A8 3.0 GHz RF Assembly
CAUTION
, position the analyzer upside down and remove the six screws (1) marked “RF Deck” securing the RF assembly to the chassis.
9. Carefully lift the RF assembly from the chassis.
The cables and assemblies are easily damaged. Once removed, it is best to lay the
RF assembly flat on a work surface. Do not rest it against any of the microcircuits or cables.
Replacement
1. Position the analyzer upside down on the work surface.
2. Referring to Figure 6-39 , tuck the cables away behind the microcircuits (4).
3. Lower the RF assembly onto the chassis taking care not to pinch any cables.
4. Referring to
, replace the six screws (1) securing the RF assembly to the chassis, and tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
5. Referring to Figure 6-39 , connect the ribbon cable (1) to the frequency
extension assembly. (E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B only)
6. Connect the SMB cable (2) to the IF assembly.
7. If the analyzer has a tracking generator, reconnect the cables (3) to it, and tighten the SMA connector to 10 inch-pounds.
Chapter 6 309
Replacing Assemblies
A8 3.0 GHz RF Assembly
8. Connect the RF assembly ribbon cable (2) as shown in
.
9. Replace the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure “A1
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
10. Replace the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
310 Chapter 6
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
RF Subassemblies
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure. CAUTION
CAUTION
Figure 6-41
A8A1 OCXO Precision Frequency Reference
(Option 1D5 - E4401B only)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the A8 1.5 GHz RF Assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
.
Precision Frequency Reference
, disconnect the control cable (1) and the SMB cable
(2) from the precision frequency assembly.
3. Remove the screws (3) and cover (4).
4. Remove the screws (5) and the assembly (6).
Replacement
1. Referring to
Figure 6-41 , replace the assembly (6) and secure with the screws
(5) .
Chapter 6 311
CAUTION
NOTE
Figure 6-42
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
2. Replace the cover (4) and screws (3).
3. Reconnect the control cable (1) and the SMB cable (2) to the precision frequency assembly.
4. Dress the cables to avoid pinching during reassembly.
A8A4 LO Amp/IF Switch Assembly
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
The LO amplifier and IF switch (LOIS) assembly can be removed without removing the RF assembly.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure
.
2. Remove the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the removal procedure “A1
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
3. Referring to
, disconnect any cables and loads (1) from the LOIS assembly.
4. Remove the three screws (2) and remove the LOIS assembly.
Removing the LO Amplifier/IF Switch Assembly
312 Chapter 6
CAUTION
CAUTION
Figure 6-43
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
Replacement
Use care not to pinch any cables during reassembly.
1. Referring to Figure 6-42 , replace the assembly and secure in place with the
three screws (2). Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
2. Reconnect the previously removed cables and loads (1). Tighten the SMA connectors to 10 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
4. Replace the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
A8A5 Input Attenuator
(E4402 (Option UKB), E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the A8 RF Assembly. Refer to the removal procedure “A8 3.0 GHz RF
Input Attenuator Hardware
Chapter 6 313
CAUTION
Figure 6-44
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
. Disconnect the input semi-rigid cable (1) from the attenuator.
3. Remove the semi-rigid cable (2) from the attenuator.
4. Disconnect the ribbon cable (3) from the attenuator.
5. Remove the screws (4).
6. Remove the attenuator from the left side as shown in Figure 6-44
.
Replacement
Use care not to pinch any cables during reassembly.
Input Attenuator Remove and Replace
1. Refer to Figure 6-44 . Install the attenuator from the left side and secure in place
with the two screws (4). Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
. Reconnect the ribbon cable (3) to the attenuator.
3. Reconnect the semi-rigid cables (1) and (2) to the attenuator. Tighten them to 10 inch-pounds.
314 Chapter 6
CAUTION
Figure 6-45
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
A8A6 YIG-Tuned Filter/Mixer
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the A8 RF assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
2. Position the A8 RF assembly right side up on the work bench.
YIG-Tuned Mixer/Filter
3. Refer to
Figure 6-45 . Remove the three semi-rigid cables (1) from the
assembly.
4. Disconnect the SMB coax cable (2) from the YTF assembly.
Chapter 6 315
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
5. Disconnect the frequency extension ribbon cable (3).
Use a T10 TORX driver to remove the two screws (4) from the assembly bracket.
6. Lift out the assembly.
Replacement
Use great care not to overtighten the SMA connections to the YIG-tuned filter/mixer assembly. If the connectors are broken loose, the assembly will have to be returned to the factory for repair.
. Replace the A8A6 YIG-tuned filter/mixer assembly onto the A8 RF assembly.
2. Replace the two screws, (4) and tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the three semi-rigid cables (1) to the assembly and tighten them to 10 inch-pounds with a 5/16” wrench.
4. Reconnect the SMB coax cable (2).
5. Reconnect the frequency extension ribbon cable (3).
6. Replace the A8 RF Assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
316 Chapter 6
CAUTION
Figure 6-46
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
A8A2 Second Converter
(E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the RF Assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
YTM Deck Cables
2. Refer to
Figure 6-46 , and position the A8 RF Assembly upright on the work
bench.
3. Disconnect the SMB cables (1) from LOIS.
4. Disconnect the SMA semi-rigid cable (2) from LOIS.
5. Disconnect the SMA semi-rigid cable (3) to the input attenuator.
6. Disconnect the SMA semi-rigid cable (4) to the dc block assembly.
7. Disconnect the ribbon cable (5) from the YTM-mixer/filter assembly.
8. Remove the four screws (6), then remove the sub-bracket from the microcircuit bracket.
Chapter 6 317
Figure 6-47
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
Second Converter, Bottom View
Figure 6-48 Second Converter Hardware
318 Chapter 6
NOTE
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
9. Refer to
Figure 6-47 . Disconnect the SMB cable (1) from the bottom side of
the second converter.
10. Refer to
. Disconnect the ribbon cable (1).
11. Remove the two screws (2) and then the single screw (3).
12. Remove the second converter assembly.
13. Remove any of the remaining cables and transfer them to the new second converter. Tighten the SMA cables to 10 inch-pounds.
Replacement
1. Refer to
. Install the second converter assembly with the single screw (3), but don’t tighten it yet.
The screws that secure the second converter in place are slightly longer than the other assembly screws.
2. Install the other two screws (2), and tighten all three screws to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Connect the ribbon cable (1) and place it as shown in
.
4. Refer to
. Replace the sub-bracket to the microcircuit bracket and replace the four screws (4). Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
5. Reconnect the SMB cable (1) to LOIS.
6. Reconnect the SMA semi-rigid cable (2) from LOIS.
7. Reconnect the SMA semi-rigid cable (3) to the input attenuator.
8. Reconnect the SMA semi-rigid cable (4) to the dc block assembly.
9. Reconnect the ribbon cable (5) to the YTM-mixer/filter assembly.
10. Replace the RF Assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A8 3.0 GHz RF Assembly” on page 307
.
RF Input Connector
(E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B)
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Remove the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
3. Remove the RF connector. For a Type-N connector, refer to the removal procedure
“Type-N Connector” on page 320 . For a APC 3.5, refer to the
Chapter 6 319
Figure 6-49
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies removal procedure
“APC 3.5 Connector” on page 320
.
RF Connector, Type-N and APC 3.5
320
Type-N Connector a. Refer to
Figure 6-49 . Gently twist the water seal (1) and remove it from
around the input connector. Make sure the O-ring (2) is retained within the water seal.
b. Use a 5/16” wrench to remove the semi-rigid (6) cable from the input connector.
c. Loosen the nut (5) from the back side of the input connector with a 9/16” wrench, and gently remove the connector, retaining the washer (4) and nut.
APC 3.5 Connector a. Refer to
Figure 6-49 . Use a 5/16” wrench to remove the semi-rigid (6)
cable from the input connector.
b. Remove the two screws that fasten the APC 3.5 connector assembly (3) to the frame.
c. Remove the connector assembly.
Chapter 6
CAUTION
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
Replacement
1. Install the RF connector. For a Type-N connector, refer to the replacement procedure
“Type-N Connector” on page 320 . For a APC 3.5, refer to the
replacement procedure
“APC 3.5 Connector” on page 320
.
Type-N Connector
. Reattach the input connector and secure with the washer(5), and nut(4). Tighten the nut to 21 inch-pounds. b. Reattach the semi-rigid cable (6) to the input connector with a 5/16” wrench. Tighten it to 10 inch-pounds.
c. Make sure the O-ring (2) is still inside the water seal (1), then gently twist and push the water seal onto the input connector.
below.
APC 3.5 Connector
. Reattach the APC 3.5 input connector assembly (2) and secure with the two screws. Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
b. Reattach the semi-rigid cable (6) to the input connector with a 5/16” wrench. Tighten it to 10 inch-pounds.
below.
2. Reconnect the A1 front frame to the chassis. Refer to the replacement procedure
“A1 Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
3. Replace the chassis cover. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
4. Replace the outer case. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
5. Refer to
Table 7-2 on page 330 for the related adjustments and performance
verification tests required for each assembly.
1.5 GHz RF Input Connector
Use ESD precautions when performing this replacement procedure.
Removal
1. Remove the analyzer chassis cover. Refer to the removal procedure “Chassis
2. Remove the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254 .
3. Remove the RF assembly. Refer to the removal procedure
Chapter 6 321
Figure 6-50
Replacing Assemblies
RF Subassemblies
A8J10 RF Input Connector
. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the input connector cover (2), and remove the cover.
5. Remove the water seal (3) from around the input connector.
6. Remove the four screws (4) that secure the input connector.
7. Apply heat to the center conductor with a soldering iron, and gently pull out the input connector.
Replacement
1. Remove excess solder from the RF board pad.
. Insert the RF connector and fasten in place with the four screws (4). Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the water seal (3) around the input connector.
4. Resolder the center conductor to the RF board.
5. Replace the input connector cover (2), and secure it with the two screws (1).
Tighten them to 9 inch-pounds.
6. Replace the RF assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure
.
7. Replace the A1 front frame assembly. Refer to the replacement procedure “A1
Front Frame Assembly” on page 254
.
322 Chapter 6
7
Post-Repair Procedures
Chapter 7 323
Post-Repair Procedures
What You Will Find in This Chapter
What You Will Find in This Chapter
The tables in this chapter list the adjustments that should be performed if there is a performance test failure or an assembly has been repaired or replaced. Automated software is required to provide most of the analyzer adjustments. Never perform adjustments as routine maintenance. Adjustments should be performed after a repair or a performance test failure. For information on installing and using the
adjustment software, refer to Chapter 8, “Performance Verification and
324 Chapter 7
Post-Repair Procedures
Safety
Safety
Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the analyzer and read the general safety considerations and the safety note definitions in the front of this guide, before you begin the procedures in this chapter.
Chapter 7 325
Post-Repair Procedures
Before You Start
Before You Start
There are three things you should do before starting an adjustment procedure: o Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the analyzer and read the general safety considerations and the symbol definitions given in the front of this service guide. o Check that the analyzer has been turned on and allowed to warm up for at least
30 minutes at room temperature before making any adjustments. The analyzer
must be allowed to stand at room temperature at least 2 hours prior to the 30 minute warm-up. o Read the rest of this section.
Finding abnormal indications during adjustments
If the indications received during an adjustment do not agree with the normal conditions given in the adjustment procedures, a fault exists in your analyzer. The fault should be repaired before proceeding with any further adjustments. Refer to
the troubleshooting and repair information in Chapter 1 of this guide.
Periodically verifying calibration
The analyzer requires periodic verification of operation. Under most conditions of use, you should test the analyzer at least once a year with the complete set of performance verification tests located in the calibration guide for your analyzer or using the performance verification and adjustment software.
When test results show proper operation and calibration, no adjustments are necessary. However, if test results indicate that the instrument does not meet specifications, the cause should be determined and rectified. Refer to the
troubleshooting information in Chapter 1
before attempting to recalibrate.
Replacing or repairing an assembly
If one or more analyzer assemblies has been replaced or repaired, related
adjustment procedures should be done prior to verifying operation. Refer to Table
7-2 to determine which adjustment to perform after replacing or repairing an
assembly. Find the assembly that has been repaired or replaced in the left-hand column. Then perform the adjustments marked across the adjustment column for that assembly. It is important that adjustments are performed in the order indicated to ensure that the instrument meets all of its specifications.
326 Chapter 7
Post-Repair Procedures
List of Tests and Adjustments for Calibration
List of Tests and Adjustments for Calibration
To perform calibration:
1. Run ALL applicable performance verification tests listed in Column 1 of
2. If any of the performance verification tests fail, perform the appropriate calibration adjustments listed in Column 2 of
Table 7-1 which corresponds to
the failure.
3. Repeat ALL of the performance verification tests listed in Column 1 of
7-1 if any calibration adjustments were made in step 2
. This will confirm that there is no interaction between adjustments which could negatively impact performance.
8
9
5, 6
7
10
11
NOTE
Table 7-1
Test
Number
1
2
3, 4
12
13, 14
If performance verifications fail and there are no corresponding calibration adjustments to be performed, or if failures continue to occur after calibration adjustments have been performed, this indicates a hardware problem. Review the
troubleshooting tips in Column 3 of Table 7-1 for possible defective assemblies.
Calibration Requirements
Column 1
Performance Verification Tests
Column 2
Calibration Adjustments
Column 3
Troubleshooting
Tips
RF 10 MHz Reference Output Accuracy
10 MHz Precision Frequency Reference
Output Accuracy
Frequency Readout and Marker
Frequency Accuracy
Frequency Span Readout Accuracy
Noise Sidebands
System Related Sidebands
Residual FM
10 MHz Reference
Adjustment
10 MHz Reference
Adjustment
None
None
IF Amplitude
IF Amplitude
None
Sweep Time Accuracy
Display Scale Fidelity
None
IF Amplitude
Align Now, All
Input Attenuation Switching Uncertainty 50 MHz Amplitude
Reference
Reference Level Accuracy IF Amplitude
Align Now, All
RF
IF/Processor/RF
RF
RF
IF
RF
RF
RF/IF
RF
RF
RF
IF
Chapter 7 327
Post-Repair Procedures
List of Tests and Adjustments for Calibration
Table 7-1 Calibration Requirements
Test
Number
Column 1
Performance Verification Tests
Column 2
Calibration Adjustments
Column 3
Troubleshooting
Tips
15
16, 17
18, 19
Resolution Bandwidth Switching
Uncertainty
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
(Reference Settings)
Overall Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
IF Amplitude
50 MHz Amplitude
Reference
IF Amplitude
None
50
51
52
20 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
21, 22, 23 Frequency Response
IF Amplitude
Frequency Response
24, 25, 26 Frequency Response (Preamp On)
27, 28 Other Input-Related Spurious Responses
Frequency Response
None
29, 30, 31 Spurious Responses
32, 33 Gain Compression
34, 35
36, 37
Displayed Average Noise Level
None
None
Frequency Response
38
39.
40, 41
42, 43
44, 45
46, 47
48
49
Residual Responses None
Fast Time Domain Amplitude Accuracy None
Tracking Generator Absolute Amplitude and Vernier Accuracy
Tracking Generator Level Flatness
Tracking Generator ALC and
Tracking Generator
Frequency Slope
Tracking Generator ALC and
Tracking Generator
Frequency Slope
None Tracking Generator Harmonic Spurious
Outputs
Tracking Generator Non-Harmonic
Spurious Outputs
None
Tracking Generator LO Feedthrough
Amplitude
Gate Delay Accuracy and Gate Length
Accuracy
LO Power (TG)
None
Gate Mode Amplitude Error
First LO Output Amplitude Accuracy
IF Input Accuracy
None
LO Power
IF Input Correction
IF
RF
IF
RF
RF/IF
RF
RF
RF
RF
RF, IF
RF, IF
RF, IF
Option AYX
TG
TG
TG
TG
TG
328 Chapter 7
Table 7-1
Test
Number
53
58
59
Post-Repair Procedures
List of Tests and Adjustments for Calibration
Calibration Requirements
Column 1
Performance Verification Tests
Column 2
Calibration Adjustments
Column 3
Troubleshooting
Tips
Comms Frequency Response
GSM — Phase and Frequency
Comms Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Frequency Response
Align Now, All
50 MHz Amplitude
Reference,
IF Amplitude,
Align Now, All
Chapter 7 329
Post-Repair Procedures
List of Tests and Adjustments for Post-Repair
List of Tests and Adjustments for Post-Repair
lists the adjustments and performance tests needed after an assembly repair or replacement. Performance tests are located in the ESA Spectrum
Analyzers Calibration Guide.
Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies Table 7-2
Assembly changed or repaired
Perform the following adjustments in the order listed
A1 Front Frame
Assembly
A2 1.5 GHz Tracking
Generator Assembly
A2A2 BITG
Microcircuit Assembly
Front Panel Internal Test
Tracking Generator ALC a
Tracking Generator
Frequency Slope
Align Now, All
Align Now, TG
L. O. Power Adjustment
Perform the following performance tests after the adjustments are completed
Displayed Average Noise Level
Residual Responses
Absolute Amplitude and Vernier Sweep Accuracy
Tracking Generator Level Flatness
Harmonic Spurious Outputs
Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs
A3 IF Assembly
A4 Processor
Assembly
Align Now, All
Processor Initialization
Processor Initialization
Absolute Amplitude and Vernier Sweep Accuracy
Tracking Generator Level Flatness
Harmonic Spurious Outputs
Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs
Reference Level Accuracy
Display Scale Fidelity
Overall Amplitude Accuracy
Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
Reference Level Accuracy
Scale Fidelity
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Displayed Average Noise Level
None A4MAU58 Processor
Battery
A5 Power Supply
Assembly
None
None
Noise Sidebands
System-Related Sidebands
Displayed Average Noise Level
Residual FM
None A6 Speaker
/Floppy Assembly
A7 Motherboard
A7A4 Frequency
Extension Assembly
A7A5 Fast ADC
Assembly
Align Now, All
YTF Adjust
LO Power
Frequency Response
None
None
System Related Sidebands
Frequency Response
Displayed Average Noise Level
None
330 Chapter 7
Post-Repair Procedures
List of Tests and Adjustments for Post-Repair
Table 7-2 Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies
Assembly changed or repaired
Perform the following adjustments in the order listed
None A7A6 FM Demod
Assembly
A7A7 Digital Demod
DSP Assembly
None
Perform the following performance tests after the adjustments are completed
None
A7A8 Digital Demod
RF Assembly
50 MHz Amplitude
Reference
IF Amplitude
Align Now, All
Sweep time accuracy
GSM Phase/Frequency b
Fast Time Domain Accuracy
Comms Frequency Response
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Display Scale Fidelity
Reference Level Accuracy
Comms Absolute Power Accuracy
A7A9 Enhanced
ACPR Dynamic
Range Assembly
Align Now, All
A7A10 Bluetooth
FM Demod Assembly
A7A13 Noise Source
Driver Assembly
A8 RF Assembly
None
None
10 MHz Reference
IF Amplitude
50 MHz Amplitude
Frequency Response
A8A1 Precision
Frequency Reference
10 MHz Reference
Displayed Average Noise Level
Residual Responses
Noise Sidebands
Noise Sidebands, Wide Offsets
None
Displayed Average Noise Level
Residual Responses
10 MHz Reference Accuracy
Noise Sidebands
System-Related Sidebands
Residual FM
Frequency Span Readout Accuracy
Frequency Readout and Marker Count Accuracy
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Frequency Response
Spurious Responses
Gain Compression
Other Input Related Spurious Responses
Displayed Average Noise Level
Residual Responses
10 MHz Reference Out Accuracy
Residual FM
Chapter 7 331
Post-Repair Procedures
List of Tests and Adjustments for Post-Repair
Table 7-2 Adjustments and Tests for Replaced or Repaired Assemblies
Assembly changed or repaired
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF
Assembly
A8A2 Second
Converter
Perform the following adjustments in the order listed
50 MHz Amplitude
Reference
Frequency Response
IF Input Correction
(Option AYZ only)
IF Input Correction
(Option AYZ only)
A8A4 LOIS LO
Amp/IF Switch
LO Power
IF Input Correction
(Option AYZ only)
Frequency Response A8A5 Input
Attenuator
A8A6 RYTHM YTF Adjust
Frequency Response a. Only necessary after a repair to the assembly b. Only with Option BAH
Perform the following performance tests after the adjustments are completed
10 MHz Reference Accuracy
Noise Sidebands
System-Related Sidebands
Residual FM
Frequency Span Readout Accuracy
Frequency Readout and Marker Count Accuracy
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Frequency Response
Spurious Responses
Gain Compression
Other Input Related Spurious Responses
Displayed Average Noise Level
Residual Responses
Displayed Average Noise Level
Frequency Response
Residual FM
IF Input Accuracy (Option AYZ only)
System Related Sidebands
Frequency Response
IF Input Accuracy (Option AYZ only)
Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty
Frequency Response
Gain Compression
Frequency Response
332 Chapter 7
8
Performance Verification and
Adjustment Software
Chapter 8 333
Performance Verification and Adjustment Software
Chapter 8
What You Will Find in This Chapter
Information about instruments with Option 226 or Option 290. ESA specific field test software information. A link to the Field Calibration Software webpage.
334 Chapter 8
Performance Verification and Adjustment Software
Chapter 8
Introduction
Instruments with Option 266 or Option 290
Instruments with Option 266, 8566 Series Programming Code Compatibility, installed and with the language set to something other than SCPI will not be able to execute or process SCPI commands. The software will notify you and set the language to SCPI prior to running the performance verification software.
Instruments with Option 290, 8590 Series Programming Code Compatibility, installed will not be able to execute or process SCPI commands. Therefore, Option
290 will need to be uninstalled prior to running the performance verification software. To uninstall or reinstall Option 290, refer to “Uninstalling/Installing
Option 290” in the 8590 Series Programming Compatibility Guide.
You can find a free download for Option 290 at: http://www.home.agilent.com/agilent/software.jspx?cc=US&lc=eng&ckey=10000
00936:epsg:sud&nid=-536902958.536881907.02&id=1000000936:epsg:sud
N7800A Calibration and Adjustment Software
http://www.agilent.com/find/calibrationsoftware provides detailed information about the field test software.
ESA Field Test Software
Go to http://calsw.tm.agilent.com. Scroll down to the table and locate the ESA platform. Select the “Help” link. This page has links to:
• Getting Started
• Required Equipment
• Performance Tests
• Adjustments
• ESA utilities
Chapter 8 335
Performance Verification and Adjustment Software
Chapter 8
336 Chapter 8
Index
Numerics
1.5 GHz tracking generator assembly troubleshooting
,
3.0 GHz RF assembly
3.0 GHz tracking generator
50 ohm RF bridge
,
,
50 ohm/75 ohm minimum loss pad
,
75 ohm matching transformer
,
75 ohm RF bridge
,
8566 Series Programming Code
Compatibility
,
A
A1 display/front panel
,
A1A1 front panel interface board
,
A1A4 backlight supply
,
A6 speaker board
,
display
,
A2 1.5 GHz tracking generator assembly troubleshooting
A2 3.0 GHz tracking generator assembly troubleshooting
A3 IF assembly
,
21.4 MHz bandpass filters
,
cal attenuator
downconverter
,
interconnections to other assemblies
,
linear detector
,
log detector
A4 processor assembly
A4A1 flash SIMM
,
,
A4A2 DRAM SIMM
analog section
,
analyzer battery information
interconnections to other assemblies
,
A4 processor assembly troubleshooting
,
A5 power supply assembly
interconnections to other assemblies
,
A7 motherboard
A7A4 frequency extension
A7J1 power supply connector
,
A7J10 through A7J16 analog card/J10 tracking generator connector
A7J2 IF assembly connector
A7J20 speaker board connector
,
A7J21 and A7J26 I/O assembly connector
A7J4 RF connector
A7J6 processor digital connector
A7J7 processor analog connector
,
A8 RF assembly
,
E4401B and E4411B
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF assembly
A8A1A1 reference/third converter
,
A8A1A2 front end/LO
A8A2 second converter
A8A3 dc block
A8A4 amplifier/IF switch (LOIS)
A8A5 input connector
,
A8A6 YIG-tuned filter/mixer
(RYTHM)
A8FL1 3.1 GHz low-pass filter (LPF)
,
A8J10 input connector
,
abbreviations
ac probe
accessories
,
50 ohm/75 ohm minimum loss pad
,
75 ohm matching transformer
ac probe
,
battery pack
,
broadband preamplifiers
carrying strap
,
,
external keyboard
GPIB cable
harmonic mixers
Parallel Interface Cable
,
preselected millimeter mixers printer
RF bridge
RF limiters
,
RS-232 cable
,
transient limiters
,
ACPR Dynamic Range Extension
acronyms
adjusting the analog converters
adjustment software
,
Agilent Technologies, contacting
align now
alignment signal
amplifier 21.4 MHz
amplifiers
analyzer battery
APC 3.5 input connector
assembly
1.5 GHz RF
,
3.0 GHz RF
,
attenuator
front frame
IF
LOIS
motherboard
power supply
processor
second converter speaker
,
tracking generator
tracking generator, 3.0 GHz
YTM
,
auto align now
auto align off
,
B
B7D and B7E digital demod assemblies troubleshooting digital demod RF, DDRF
digital signal processing, DSP
,
backlight backlight supply
,
backpack
basic checks
battery
,
battery pack
Benchlink
,
,
Benchlink Web Remote Control
Software
,
BITG microcircuit assembly block diagrams
–
138 blown fuse
,
Bluetooth
FM Demodulation
General Purpose Bundle
,
Measurement Personality
Premium Bundle
,
bootrom self-test
broadband preamplifiers
C cable
GPIB
,
parallel interface
,
RS-232
Cable TV Measurement Personality
,
calibration verifying
calibration requirements carrying case
,
carrying strap
,
, cdmaOne operation chassis cover
,
checking power supply
checking the basics
clearing EPROM
clearing RAM
connector
A7J1 power supply
,
A7J10 through A7J16 analog card/J10 tracking generator
A7J2 IF assembly
A7J20 speaker board
,
A7J21 and A7J26 I/O assembly
A7J4 RF
Index-337
Index
A7J6 processor, digital
A7J7 processor, analog
,
connector, type-N
,
cooling fan
,
corrected performance
,
cover
,
chassis inner
,
D
DAC controlling tuning
,
,
dc probes use of
dead instrument
demodulation
Bluetooth FM detector modes
,
,
diagnostic routines
display
,
display backlight
,
display/front panel
,
A1A1 front panel interface board
,
A1A4 backlight supply
A6 speaker board
displays, external
Distance to Fault Measurement
Personality
distorted signal
,
downconversion
downconverting
,
E electrostatic discharge
,
EMI
Low Emission (Option 060)
EPROM
,
EPROM, clearing
ESD Information
excessive loss
external keyboard
,
F fan
fast ADC assembly
,
firmware queries
flash EPROM
flatness tolerance
,
floppy speaker assembly
FM demod assembly
frequency extension assembly
,
frequency response
front frame assembly
front panel interface board
front panel rpg fuse
,
,
G
GPIB
GPIB cable
,
GSM Measurement Personality
H harmonic output levels
high band block diagram high band quick check
,
high band troubleshooting points
,
high noise floor high signal amplitude
horizontal trace, checking
how to return your analyzer for service
,
I
IF assembly
21.4 MHz bandpass filters
,
cal attenuator
downconverter
,
interconnections to other assemblies
,
linear detector
,
log detector
IF assembly connector
IF gain
IF problem
,
IF problem isolation
,
,
,
initial checks of processor inner cover
inner shield
,
inoperative analyzer
,
inoperative analyzer troubleshooting
,
input attenuator
input connector
1.5 GHz RF
,
connector
input connector, APC 3.5
instrument outer case
,
interface bus
GPIB
,
RS-232
internal diagnostic routines
introduction performance verification
performance verification tests
isolating amplitude failures
,
K keypad/flex circuit
L
LCD display
LCD display troubleshooting
LED patterns
lens/keypad assembly
,
limiters
RF and transient line fuse
LO
,
,
LO amp/IF switch asse
,
LO amp/IF switch assembly
LO problem
LO problem isolation
load default
,
log amplifier errors
,
LOIS
,
LOIS LO amp/IF switch
low band troubleshooting points
,
,
low signal amplitude
,
low signal level
M media door/bezel
mixers
External Mixing (Option AYZ) harmonic
preselected millimeter mnemonics
,
mnemonics pin locations
,
motherboard
,
motherboard assembly
motherboard mnemonics
,
motherboard mnemonics and connectors
,
multipliers
N
N2714A test and adj. software
non-harmonic output levels
,
O
OCXO
OCXO precision frequency reference
,
Option 106
Option 1AX
,
Option 226
Option B70
Option B7B (TV trigger and picture on screen)
Options
,
RS-232 and parallel interface
,
ordering options
,
outer case
Index-338
Index output power, TG
,
P packaging
,
packaging materials
,
Parallel Interface Cable
parts assembly level
how to order
,
reference designators
,
replaceable
password
performance test software
performance verification introduction
,
software
performance verification tests introduction
,
software
Personality
Bluetooth
Cable TV
,
Distance to Fault
,
GSM
Phase Noise Measurement Personality
,
phase noise personality
PLL operation
,
,
post-repair adjustments power amplifiers power supply
,
power supply assembly
,
interconnections to other assemblies
,
power supply connector power sweep
,
power-up problems
preamplifiers
precision frequency
,
precision frequency reference printer
,
printer connector parallel
probe power connector voltages
probes ac and dc
,
problems at power-up
processor assembly
,
,
A4A1 flash SIMM
,
A4A2 DRAM SIMM
,
analog section analyzer battery information
interconnections to other assemblies
,
processor assembly troubleshooting
,
processor, analog connector
processor, digital connector
,
R
RAM, clearing
,
rear-panel battery information label
,
reference
reference designators
,
remote control
8566 Series Programming Code
Compatibility
,
Benchlink Web Remote Control
Software
,
replaceable parts
,
restore system defaults
returning your analyzer
,
returning your analyzer for service
,
RF
,
RF assembly
21.4 MHz amplifier
,
A7A4 frequency extension
A8A1 3.0 GHz RF assembly
,
A8A1A1 reference/third converter
,
A8A1A2 front end/LO
A8A2 second converter
A8A3 dc block
,
,
A8A4 amplifier/IF switch(LOIS)
,
A8A5 input connector
A8A6 YIG-tuned filter/mixer
(RYTHM)
,
A8FL1 3.1 GHz low-pass filter
(LPF)
A8J10 input connector
attenuator
first IF amplifier/filter/attenuator
,
first mixer frequency reference input connector
,
,
input protection
LO
,
LO, A8A1 OCXO
LO, first LO
,
LO, second LO
,
low-pass filter
,
second mixer
RF assembly, 1.5 GHz
RF assembly, 3.0 GHz
RF bridge
RF connector
RF input connector
RF input connector, 1.5 GHz
RF limiters
RF performance check
,
RF problem
RF quick check
RF section block diagram
RF section high band block diagram
,
RF section performance
RF section, low band block diagram
,
RF section, verifying performance
RF subassemblies
,
RF troubleshooting points
RF troubleshooting, detailed
RF troubleshooting, detailed, high band
rpg replacement
RS-232
,
,
RS-232 Cable
RS-232 cable
RYTHM
,
S second converter
service menu password
service tag
shipping container
software performance verification
performance verification tests
speaker assembly
speaker board
,
speaker/floppy assembly spurious output
,
system defaults, restoring
,
T test software
,
TG LO unlock
,
timebase function tracking generator
,
,
tracking generator ALC adjustment
tracking generator assembly
tracking generator assembly, 3.0 GHz
,
tracking generator assembly, 3.0 GHz troubleshooting
,
tracking generator boards
tracking generator output power
tracking generator power sweep tracking generator, 1.5 GHz
,
,
,
tracking generator, 3.0 GHz transient limiter
troubleshoot the RF section
troubleshooting
LO, IF, video problems
,
troubleshooting A2 1.5 GHz tracking generator assembly
Index-339
Index troubleshooting A2 3.0 GHz tracking generator assembly
,
troubleshooting A4 processor assembly
,
troubleshooting B7D and B7E digital demod assemblies digital demod RF, DDRF
,
digital signal processing, DSP
,
troubleshooting inoperative analyzer
,
troubleshooting LCD display
troubleshooting the processor
TV Trigger and Picture on Screen
type-N connector
,
U uncorrected performance
unleveled TG output
V verifying calibration
verifying cdmaOne operation
,
verifying the A3 IF assembly performance
,
vernier accuracy tolerance
,
VGA monitor
vibration support bar
video problem
video problem isolation
,
video shift
visible align
Y
YIG-tuned filter/mixer
,
YTM
,
Index-340

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- High sensitivity
- Wide dynamic range
- Fast sweep speeds
- Accurate frequency measurements
- Powerful analysis software
- Flexible I/O options
- User-friendly interface
- High-performance RF section